Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreword
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems result-
ing from modification will not be covered
under the NISSAN warranties.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-
TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of
driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
.
NEVER drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
options available on this model. Therefore,
you may find some information that does
not apply to your vehicle.
.
ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-
its and never drive too fast for
conditions.
.
ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle
features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design at any time without
notice.
.
.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and
appropriate child restraint systems.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.
When you require any service or have any
questions, we will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to us.
ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety
features to all occupants of the
vehicle.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
.
ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-
ual for important safety information.
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s
Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with
controls and maintenance requirements, assist-
ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above call attention to an item in the illustration.
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.
Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
SIC0697
CAUTION
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed care-
fully.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
SORY
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
of the vehicle.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above indicate movement or action.
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon
and Xanavi Informatics Corpora-
tion.
Gracenote® is a registered tra-
demark of Gracenote, Inc. The
Gracenote logo and logo type,
and the “Powered by Gracenote”
logo are trademarks of Grace-
note.
XM Radio® requires a subscrip-
tion, sold separately after the first
90 days. It is not available in
Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For
more information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
C
* 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
TOKYO, JAPAN
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-
copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you
would like to provide NISSAN directly with
comments or questions, please contact the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using
our toll-free number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for
the following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information on
the left at:
For U.S. customers
—
—
Your name, address, and telephone number
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Vehicle identification number (attached to
the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
—
Date of purchase
—
Current odometer reading
Your NISSAN dealer’s name
Your comments or questions
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
—
—
OR
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-8
System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2
Coupe models............................................... 0-8
Roadster models............................................ 0-9
Cockpit.......................................................... 0-10
Instrument panel .............................................. 0-11
Meters and gauges........................................... 0-12
Engine compartment ......................................... 0-13
VQ37VHR engine model................................ 0-13
Warning and indicator lights ............................... 0-14
Coupe models............................................... 0-2
Roadster models............................................ 0-3
Coupe models............................................... 0-5
Roadster models............................................ 0-6
Exterior (NISMO models) ..................................... 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
8. Front seats (P.1-3)
SSI0648
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-27)
COUPE MODELS
1. Seat belts (Page 1-8)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-27)
— Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-38)
6. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether strap
child restraint) (P.1-19)
2. Head restraints (P.1-5)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags (P.1-27)
7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
(P.1-32)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSI0649
4. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-27)
ROADSTER MODELS
1. Seat belts (P.1-8)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-27)
— Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-38)
6. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
(P.1-32)
2. Head restraints (P.1-5)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags (P.1-27)
7. Front seats (P.1-3)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR FRONT
5. Outside mirrors (P.3-38)
6. Recovery hook (P.6-22)
7. License plate installation (P.9-13)
8. Tires
— Wheels and tires (P.8-28, P.9-8)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-10, P.5-3)
9. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)
— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-13)
SSI0594
1. Hood (P.3-16)
3. Windshield wiper and washer
— Operation (P.2-27)
2. Headlight and turn signal
— Operation (P.2-29)
— Maintenance (P.8-18)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-24)
4. Power windows (P.2-42)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR REAR
7. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-34)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
SSI0506
4. Rear hatch
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)
COUPE MODELS
1. High-mounted stop light (bulb replacement)
(P.8-24)
— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-13)
— Rear hatch opener switch (P.3-17)
2. Rear window defroster (P.2-29)
5. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-33)
3. Satellite antenna (if so equipped) (P.4-25)
6. Rear combination light (bulb replacement)
(P.8-24)
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Fuel
— Fuel-filler door (P.3-34)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
SSI0658
4. Rear window defroster (P.2-29)
5. Soft top (P.3-21)
ROADSTER MODELS
1. Trunk lid opener switch (P.3-19)
6. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-20)
7. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-33)
2. High-mounted stop light (bulb replacement)
(P.8-25)
8. Rear combination light (bulb replacement)
(P.8-25)
3. Antenna (P.4-25)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR (NISMO models)
For NISMO models, the vehicle parts listed
below require special care or caution for
treating. Refer to the additional information in
each section.
1. Performance dampers (P.5-29)
2. Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter
(P.3-32, P.6-21)
3. Side sill extensions (P.3-32)
4. Rear spoiler (P.3-18, P.7-3)
5. Exhaust pipes (P.3-32, P.6-21)
6. Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser
(P.3-32, P.6-21)
SSI0585
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
8. Console box
— Power outlet (P.2-37)
— USB memory operation (if so equipped)
(P.4-52)
— iPod® player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-61)
9. Front cup holders (P.2-38)
SSI0650
5. Map light (P.2-44)
COUPE MODELS
6. Inside rearview mirror
1. Cargo cover (if so equipped) (P.2-41)
2. Secondary rear hatch release (P.3-18)
— Operation (P.3-36)
— HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P.2-47)
3. Power windows (P.2-42)
7. Rear parcel box (P.2-40)
— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-38)
4. Sun visors (P.3-36)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Console box
— Power outlet (P.2-37)
— USB memory operation (if so equipped)
(P.4-52)
— iPod® player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-61)
7. Front cup holders (P.2-38)
SSI0651
4. Inside rearview mirror
ROADSTER MODELS
— Operation (P.3-36)
1. Power windows (P.2-42)
— HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P.2-47)
— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-38)
5. Rear parcel box (P.2-40)
2. Sun visors (P.3-36)
3. Map light (P.2-44)
— Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-21)
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COCKPIT
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
— Menu control switch or tuning switch (P.4-71)
— BACK switch (P.4-71)
— Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-74)
— Volume control switches (P.4-71)
— Source select switch (P.4-71)
10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-35)
11. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-34)
— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-27)
12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-20)
13. Selector lever for automatic transmission (P.5-12)/
Shift lever for manual transmission (P.5-16)
14. Parking brake (P.5-20)
SSI0652
5. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-27)
1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.5-27)
6. Hood release handle (P.3-16)
7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10)
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch (P.2-29)
3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-4)
4. Triple meter (P.2-7)
8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14)
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Seat heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) or
Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-36)
9. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models)
(P.3-21)
10. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) switch
(if so equipped) (P.5-16)
11. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-17)
— Rear window defroster switch (P.2-29)
12. Audio system (P.4-24)
13. Power outlet (P.2-37)
14. Glove box (P.2-39)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SSI0653
3. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-32)
1. Ventilator (P.4-17)
2. Center display and multi-function control panel
(P.4-2)/Instrument pocket (P.2-38)
— Navigation system* (if so equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
(if so equipped) (P.4-6)
4. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-27)
5. Fuse box cover (P.8-20)
6. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-33)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) (P.4-74)
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
SSI0521
10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-5)
11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-5)
12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-7)
13. Voltmeter (P.2-7)
14. Clock (P.2-7, P.2-23)
SSI0509
1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-20)
2. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)
7. Vehicle information display (P.2-16)
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)
3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-8)
4. Tachometer (P.2-5)
9. Transmission position indicator (if so equipped)
(P.2-12)
— SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator
(if so equipped) (P.5-16)
5. Speedometer (P.2-5)
6. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-32)
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)
SSI0510
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission mod-
els) (P.8-12)
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)
2. Battery (P.8-14)
8. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
9. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
10. Air cleaner (P.8-18)
3. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)
4. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)
5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)
11. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
Illustrated table of contents 0-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Indicator
light
Indicator
light
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-12
Name
Page
2-15
Name
Page
2-9
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
off indicator light
Cruise indicator light
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
*: if so equipped
Front passenger air bag status
light
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-12
2-15
Automatic Transmission (AT)
check warning light
2-9
2-9
High beam indicator light
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
Brake warning light
Rear fog light indicator light*
Security indicator light
Slip indicator light
Charge warning light
2-10
2-10
2-10
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Intelligent Key system warning
light
Small light indicator lights
Low tire pressure warning light 2-10
Soft top indicator light (Road-
ster models)
Master warning light
2-11
2-11
2-12
SynchroRev Match mode (S-
MODE) indicator*
Seat belt warning light
Transmission position indicator
light*
Supplemental air bag warning
light
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
0-14 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats .............................................................. 1-2
Front seats ................................................... 1-3
Head restraints.............................................. 1-5
Seat belts ........................................................ 1-8
Pregnant women.......................................... 1-13
Injured persons............................................ 1-13
Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-13
Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-16
Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-16
Child restraints ................................................ 1-17
Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-17
Child restraint installation using the seat belts
(for Coupe models) ...................................... 1-19
Booster seats.................................................. 1-23
Precautions on booster seats.......................... 1-23
Booster seat installation................................. 1-25
Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-27
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-27
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ................................................ 1-32
Front seat-mounted side-impact and roof/door-
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air
bag systems ............................................... 1-36
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-38
Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-39
Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-39
Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-40
Top tether strap child restraint
(for Coupe models) ...................................... 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
.
The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seat-
back is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.
CAUTION
.
When adjusting the seat positions,
be sure not to contact any moving
parts to avoid possible injuries and/
or damages.
SSS0133
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON
SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
section.
WARNING
.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
.
.
After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRONT SEATS
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
.
.
The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
SSS0928
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with
the parking brake fully applied.
Forward and backward:
1
*
Moving the switch
forward or backward will
slide the seat forward or backward to the
desired position.
Reclining:
2
Move the recline switch
backward until the
*
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
2
*
forward again, move the switch
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section.) The seatback may
also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA1715
SSS0394
Seat lifter (if so equipped)
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
the seat cushion to the desired position.
belt fit. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section. The seatback may
also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with
the parking brake fully applied.
Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1
Pull the lever up
while you slide the seat
*
forward or backward to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
Reclining:
2
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and
*
lean back. To bring the seatback forward again,
pull the lever and move your body forward. The
seatback will move forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
head restraints properly, as specified in
this section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not
attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint
has been removed. If the head restraint
was removed, reinstall and properly
adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
can reduce the effectiveness of the
head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
SSS0684
SSS1007
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. The head re-
straints are adjustable.
Lumbar support (if so equipped)
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver.
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.
1
*
Move the lever
up or down to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0992
SSS0997
SSS0993
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Components
Adjustment
1. Head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Models with climate controlled seats
are designed so that the head restraint
cannot be removed. The head restraint
may be damaged if the head restraint is
forcibly pulled out.
SSS0994
SSS0995
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0996
SSS0508
The Active Head Restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
movement of the head restraint helps support
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
the adjustment notches
must be in-
*
2
*
stalled in the hole with the lock knob
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described earlier in this section.
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and in-
crease the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is
not worn properly.
SSS0136A
.
Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your
chest. Never put the belt behind
your back, under your arm or across
your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
.
.
Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
SSS0134A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
buckle.
retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.
.
Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
.
.
Removal and installation of the
pretensioner system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
.
Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN
recommends that all seat belt as-
semblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was
minor and the belts show no da-
mage and continue to operate prop-
erly.
Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may in-
dicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
SSS0016
Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
.
No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do
not modify the seat belt, add mate-
rial or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or
tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the
seat belt system may result in
serious personal injury.
.
All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
instructions and replacement re-
commendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
.
Once a seat belt pretensioner has
activated, it cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
SSS0014
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
properly. The shoulder belt may come
too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate
child restraints.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and
80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional pro-
tection.
.
.
.
Rear-facing child restraint
Front-facing child restraint
Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits
close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of
the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so that the
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap
belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only
be used in seating positions that have a three-
point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Once the child has grown so the
shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
Infants
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-
facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-
straints are available for children who outgrow
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help position
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front-facing child restraint.
Infants up to at least one year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint. The
passenger seat is not suitable for use with a
rear-facing child restraint for infants. Therefore,
infants should not be transported in this vehicle.
Small children (for Coupe models)
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
WARNING
Children need special protection. The
vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0927
For Roadster models
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
WARNING
.
.
.
Rear-facing child restraint (should not be
installed in Roadster models)
.
.
Do not let infants and small children
ride in Roadster models.
Front-facing child restraint (should not be
installed in Roadster models)
Roadster models are not designed
to accommodate Rear-facing child
restraints or Front-facing child re-
straints.
Booster seat (only children large enough for
booster seats can ride in Roadster models)
.
If you let infants or small children
ride in Roadster models, they may
be killed or seriously injured in a
crash.
WARNING
.
Never let an infant or a small child
who requires the use of a rear or
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INJURED PERSONS
front-facing child restraint ride in
this vehicle. Do not attempt to hold
a child in your lap or arms.
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
your doctor for specific recommendations.
.
.
Roadster models do not have an
anchor for a top tether strap re-
quired for most child restraints.
Never let children who require the
use of rear or front-facing child
restraints ride in this vehicle.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
Larger children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may
not fit them properly. The shoulder
belt may come too close to the face
or neck. The lap belt may not fit over
their small hip bones. In an acci-
dent, an improperly fitting seat belt
could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child re-
straints.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
SSS0292
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this
section.)
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
PREGNANT WOMEN
.
.
The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
properly.
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist, and
place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and
across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder
belt over your abdominal area. Contact your
doctor for specific recommendations.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
Pull the seat belt out until it is fully extended to
activate the ALR mode. Detach the seat belt
tongue from the buckle and retract the seat belt
completely to cancel the ALR mode and revert
back to the ELR mode.
When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. For additional information, see
“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.
SSS0290
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is
activated it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The three-point type seat belts have two modes
of operation:
.
.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
allow the driver and passengers some freedom
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
restrict further belt movement.
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any question about seat belt
operation, see a NISSAN dealer.
SSS0326
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement by two separate methods:
.
When the belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
.
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
.
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with
purchasing an extender if an extender is
required.
dry.
.
.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
WARNING
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
assembly should be replaced.
.
.
.
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with the
NISSAN seat belts.
Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accident.
SSS0588
Shoulder belt arm (for Coupe models)
Before fastening the seat belt, pull the shoulder
belt arm forward until it clicks at the detent
position.
Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured in a
collision or a sudden stop.
Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy access
to the belt.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
.
To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
or kill your child.
.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a child restraint can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
WARNING
.
Infants and small children should
always be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-
straint can result in serious injury or
death.
.
.
Roadster models are not equipped
with upper tether anchors. Do not
install a child restraint system in
Roadster models.
.
.
Children should always be placed in
an appropriate child restraint while
riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a
child restraint can result in serious
injury or death.
Follow all of the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation and use. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure to select
one which will fit your child and
vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of child
restraints in your vehicle.
SSS0099
Children should never be carried on
your lap. It is not possible for even
the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The
child could be crushed between the
adult and parts of the vehicle. Also,
do not put the same seat belt
around both your child and yourself.
.
.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden
stop greatly increases.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating supplemental
front air bag could seriously injure
SSS0100
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a
rear-facing child restraint for infants. Therefore,
infants should not be transported in this vehicle.
seat belts or harnesses.
CAUTION
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the child restraint,
but as upright as possible.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the child
restraint.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on front-facing child
restraints to be secured to the designated
anchor point on the vehicle.
After attaching the child restraint,
test it before you place the child in
it. Push it from side to side while
holding the seat by the seat belt
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
In general, child restraints are designed to be
installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder
seat belt.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
children of various sizes. When selecting any
child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
.
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
.
.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
.
When your child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with a seat belt
to prevent it from being thrown
around in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Do not allow cargo to contact the
top tether strap when it is attached
to the top tether anchor. Properly
secure the cargo so it does not
contact the top tether strap. Cargo
that is not properly secured or that
contacts the top tether strap may
damage the top tether strap during
a collision. Your child could be
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion if the child restraint top tether
strap is damaged.
SSS0929
SSS0100
Top tether anchor point location
The Anchor point is located on the floor of the
cargo area.
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS (for Coupe
models)
STRAINT (for Coupe models)
Installing top tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
If the manufacturer of your child restraint
requires the use of a top tether strap, it must
be secured to an anchor point.
WARNING
Flip down the flap marked with a label as shown
in the illustration. Position the top tether strap
over the top of the seatback and secure it to the
tether anchor bracket that provides the straight-
est installation. Tighten the strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Supplemental front
air bags inflate with great force. A
rear-facing child restraint could be
struck by the supplemental front air
bag in a crash and could seriously
injure or kill your child.
WARNING
.
The child restraint anchor point is
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances is it to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint, consult
your NISSAN dealer for details.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the seatback.
.
.
The three-point seat belt in your
vehicle is equipped with an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
must be used when installing a child
restraint.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this
section.)
Failure to use the ALR will result in
the child restraint not being prop-
erly secured. The restraint could tip
over or otherwise be unsecured and
cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head
restraint when the child restraint is removed.
The instructions in this section apply to child
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts
in the front passenger seat.
SSS0640
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the front
passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in this vehicle.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0360B
SSS0651
SSS0652
Front-facing — step 3
Front-facing — step 4
Front-facing — step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is
in the ALR mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 8.
SSS0653
SSS0641
Front-facing — step 6
Front-facing — step 8
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
seat belt path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, you may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT (for Coupe models)” earlier in
this section.)
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEATS
forces of a severe accident. The
child could be crushed between the
adult and parts of the vehicle. Also,
do not put the same seat belt
around both your child and yourself.
.
.
A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
three-point type seat belt with a
booster seat can result in a serious
injury in sudden stop or collision.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a booster seat can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
SSS0988
SSS0099
Front-facing — step 11
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, push the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
status light
should illuminate. If this
.
.
A child restraint that requires a top
tether strap for installation should
not be used in Roadster models.
Roadster models are not equipped
with upper tether anchors.
light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this section.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
.
Children should always be placed in
an appropriate child restraint while
riding in the vehicle. A child restraint
that requires a top tether strap for
installation should not be used in
Roadster models. Failure to use a
child restraint or booster seat can
result in serious injury or death.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster
seat. Items such as these may move
during normal driving or a collision
and result in serious injury or death.
Booster seats are designed to be
.
Children should never be carried on
your lap. It is not possible for even
the strongest adult to resist the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos-
ter seats are designed to properly
route the lap and shoulder portions
of the seat belt over the strongest
portions of a child’s body to provide
the maximum protection during a
collision.
.
.
Do not put the shoulder belt behind
the child or under the child’s arm. If
you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT
INSTALLATION” later in this section.
When your booster seat is not in
use, keep it secured with a seat belt
to prevent it from being thrown
around in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
.
.
Follow all of the booster seat man-
ufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use. When purchasing a
booster seat, be sure to select one
which will fit your child and vehicle.
It may not be possible to properly
install some types of booster seats
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
LRS0455
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the booster
seat.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
If the booster seat and seat belt is
not used properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision or a
sudden stop greatly increases.
.
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the booster seat,
but as up- right as possible.
After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt,
make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the abdomen.
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
front passenger seat:
SSS0363
LRS0454
.
.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
.
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
*
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
high back booster seat
should be used.
*
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the front passenger seat.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
BELT” earlier in this section.
SSS0640
LRS0454
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, adjust the seatback so that
it is upright and then move the seat to
the rearmost position. Do not move the
seat with the booster seat attached to
it.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster seat
fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this
section.) If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
Door-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system (for Roadster mod-
els): This system can help cushion the impact
force to the heads of occupants in front seating
positions during certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concern-
ing the driver and passenger front impact
supplemental air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System), front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system, roof-mounted
(Coupe models) or door-mounted (Roadster
models) curtain side-impact supplemental air
bag and seat belt with pretensioners.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away from
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this
section for instructions and precautions on seat
belt usage.)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
SSS0988
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, push the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side impact collisions. The front seat side-
impact supplemental air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
status light
may or may not illuminate
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat used. (See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.)
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system (for Coupe models):
This system can help cushion the impact force
to the head of the driver and front passenger in
certain side impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-
verity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
.
.
The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
SSS0131B
The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the supplemental front air bag
if you are up against it when it
SSS0132B
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far-away as prac-
tical from the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Always use the
seat belts.
the steering wheel rim could in-
crease the risk of injury if the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
.
The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
SSS0007
.
The front passenger seat is
equipped with an occupant classifi-
cation sensor (pattern sensor) that
turns the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
.
Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
SSS0006
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
.
.
Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained.
SSS0008
SSS0099
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in
this section for details.
SSS0009
SSS0100
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ways wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury
in various kinds of accidents.
.
The seat belts, side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side
air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side
roof rails (Coupe models)/door trim
(Roadster models). Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats to
extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
SSS0059A
SSS0159
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted
(Coupe models) or door-mounted
(Roadster models) curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags:
.
Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.
.
The front seat-mounted side-impact
air bags and roof-mounted (Coupe
models) or door-mounted (Roadster
models) curtain air bags ordinarily
will not inflate in the event of a
frontal impact, rear impact, rollover
or lower severity side collision. Al-
SSS0162
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Occupant classification system control unit
10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
11. Satellite sensors
12. Seat belt with pretensioner
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-
TEM (front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger supplemental front-impact air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel above
the glove box. The front air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in
certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack
of it) is not always an indication of proper front
air bag operation.
SSS1012
1. Crash zone sensor
5. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bag inflators (for Roadster models)
2. Supplemental front air bag modules (NISSAN
Advanced Air Bags)
6. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags (for Roadster models)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags (for Coupe models)
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle
7. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bag inflators (for Coupe models)
8. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switches and the occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on
the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for
the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant
classification sensor is also monitored. Based
on information from the sensors, only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
crash severity and whether the front occupants
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front
passenger air bag may be automatically turned
OFF under some conditions, depending on the
information provided by the occupant classifica-
tion sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
the passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light
will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off).
(See “Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section for further details.) One front
air bag inflating does not indicate improper
performance of the system.
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the head
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
an inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the air bag module during
inflation.
SSS0988
Front passenger air bag status light
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection.
Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, contact a NISSAN dealer. If you are
considering modification of your vehicle due to a
disability, you may also contact a NISSAN
dealer. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The supplemental front air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF.
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a
crash instead of being OFF. (See “CHILD
RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for proper
use and installation.)
Status light:
The front passenger air bag status light
located above the ashtray. The light operates as
follows:
is
The occupant classification sensor (pattern
sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion
and is designed to detect an occupant and
objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag
System is designed to turn the passenger air
bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.
Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in
the regulations is on the seat, the occupant
classification sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
.
Unoccupied passenger seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
is
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly.
.
Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
the front passenger air bag is OFF and will
not inflate in a crash.
illuminates to indicate that
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as
outlined in this manual should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause the
sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
.
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The light
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
is OFF to indicate
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
in your vehicle are not part of this system.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting
on the seat properly.
The occupant classification sensor is designed
to operate as described above to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF for specified child
restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restrains and to use the ALR mode (child
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
child and the type of child restraint being used. If
the passenger air bag status light is not
illuminated (indicating that the air bag might
inflate in a crash), it could be that the child
restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.
Make sure that the child restraint is installed
properly, the seat belt is used properly and the
occupant is positioned properly. If the passen-
ger air bag status light is still not illuminated, try
a different child restraint.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
personal injury.
.
.
Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you
may severely burn yourself.
WARNING
.
Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bag inflates.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the air bag system. This is to
prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to
the supplemental air bag system.
If the passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, do not transport
a child in this vehicle.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag sys-
tem.
.
Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat that
will leave permanent impressions in
the seat. Such objects can damage
the seat or occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). This can
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious perso-
nal injury.
Tampering with the front air bag
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by
placing material over the steering
wheel pad and above the instrument
panel or by installing additional trim
material around the air bag system.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the passenger
seat status. However, if the seat becomes
unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain
off.
.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
This can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor. This can
also affect the operation of the air
bag system and result in serious
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
, located in the meter and gauges area
.
Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
will blink. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
serious personal injury. For exam-
ple, do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim ma-
terial, such as seat covers, on the
seat that is not specifically designed
to assure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any ob-
jects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant
classification sensor.
devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
.
A cracked windshield should be
replaced immediately by a qualified
repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
SSS0982
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may
affect the front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal in-
jury.
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-
PACT AND ROOF/DOOR-MOUNTED
CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMEN-
TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air
bags are located in the side roof rails (Coupe) or
upper side of the door trim (Roadster). These
systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-
lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-
position occupants. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity side
collisions, although they may inflate if the forces
Work on and around the front air
bag system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized elec-
trical test equipment and probing
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in another type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity side impact. They are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
collisions on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain
air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the out-of-position occupants. Because of this,
the force of the side air bags and curtain air
bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against, these air
bag modules during inflation. The side air bags
and curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the
collision is over.
components will be hot. Do not
touch them; you may severely burn
yourself.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent acciden-
tal inflation of the side air bag and
curtain air bag or damage to side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental side air bag
and curtain air bag operation.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
When side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a
fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by
release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The air bag warning light
will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
systems are operational.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
and pelvis of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants. They can help save lives and
reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
side air bags and curtain air bags may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and
curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the
lower body.
Tampering with the air bag system
may result in serious personal in-
jury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatback or by installing addi-
tional trim material, such as seat
covers, around the side air bags.
WARNING
.
Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door
finisher and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a side
air bag inflates.
.
Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should
be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-
stallation of electrical equipment
should also be done by a NISSAN
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag, and seated
as far away as practical from the door finishers
.
Right after inflation, several side air
bags and curtain air bag system
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
certain types of collisions, helping to restrain
front seat occupants.
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side-
impact air bag system.
.
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is
to prevent damage to or accidental
activation of the pretensioners.
Tampering with the pretensioner
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same
way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner seat belt activates, smoke
is released and a loud noise may be heard. The
smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
*
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
Work around and on the preten-
sioner system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the pretensioner system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front seats)
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning light
will not come on, will flash intermittently or
will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after
the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON
position. In this case, the pretensioner system
may not function properly. They must be
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
If you need to dispose of the
pretensioner or scrap the vehicle,
contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct
pretensioner disposal procedures
are set forth in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
WARNING
.
.
The pretensioners cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner
is not activated, be sure to have the
pretensioner system checked and, if
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the seat belt preten-
sioners and guide the buyer to the appropriate
sections in this Owner’s Manual.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-
tion with the front air bag system. Working with
the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat
belt when the vehicle becomes involved in
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.
This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on approximately 7 seconds after
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
SSS1016
SPA1097
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
The supplemental air bag warning light, display-
ing
in the instrument panel, monitors the
circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted (Coupe models) or door-
mounted (Roadster models) curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag, and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash
zone sensor, occupant classification system,
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all
related wiring.
1 SRS air bag
*
The warning labels are located on the surface of
the sun visors.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and preten-
sioner system cannot be repaired.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
CEDURE
.
.
The front air bag, side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and the
pretensioner system should be in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer if there
is any damage to the front end or
side portion of the vehicle.
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to activate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-
curred. Repair and replacement of these sys-
tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.
If you need to dispose of the
supplemental air bag or preten-
sioner systems or scrap the vehicle,
contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct
supplemental air bag and seat belt
pretensioner system disposal pro-
cedures are set forth in the appro-
priate NISSAN Service Manual.
Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
air bags, pretensioners and related parts should
be pointed out to the person conducting the
maintenance. The ignition switch should always
be in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
.
Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
if any of the front air bags inflate,
the activated pretensioner must
also be replaced. The air bag mod-
ule and pretensioner system should
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit............................................................ 2-2
Instrument panel ................................................ 2-3
Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4
Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5
Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-6
Triple meter .................................................. 2-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......... 2-8
Checking bulbs ............................................. 2-8
Warning lights............................................... 2-9
Indicator lights............................................. 2-12
Audible reminders ........................................ 2-15
Vehicle information display.................................. 2-16
Indicators for operation.................................. 2-16
Warnings and alerts...................................... 2-18
Indicators for maintenance.............................. 2-19
Trip computer.............................................. 2-20
Security systems.............................................. 2-25
Vehicle security system.................................. 2-25
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-26
Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-27
Rear window defroster switch ............................. 2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-29
Xenon headlights ......................................... 2-29
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-30
Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-33
Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-33
Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-33
Horn ............................................................. 2-34
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-37
Power outlet ................................................... 2-37
Storage ......................................................... 2-38
Instrument pocket (except for navigation system
equipped models) ........................................ 2-38
Cup holders................................................ 2-38
Glove box .................................................. 2-39
Console box ............................................... 2-40
Rear parcel box ........................................... 2-40
Cargo cover (if so equipped) .......................... 2-41
Windows ....................................................... 2-42
Power windows ........................................... 2-42
Interior lights................................................... 2-44
Map lights .................................................. 2-44
Interior light control switch ............................. 2-44
Vanity mirror lights............................................ 2-45
Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster models) .......... 2-46
Cargo light (Coupe models) ............................... 2-46
Trunk light (Roadster models).............................. 2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) .... 2-47
Programming HomeLink® ............................... 2-47
Programming trouble-diagnosis ....................... 2-49
Clearing the programmed information................ 2-49
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button ........ 2-49
If your vehicle is stolen .................................. 2-50
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers .................................................. 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COCKPIT
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
— Menu control switch or tuning switch (P.4-71)
— BACK switch (P.4-71)
— Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-74)
— Volume control switches (P.4-71)
— Source select switch (P.4-71)
10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-35)
11. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-34)
— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-27)
12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-20)
13. Selector lever for automatic transmission (P.5-12)/
Shift lever for manual transmission (P.5-16)
14. Parking brake (P.5-20)
SSI0652
5. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-27)
1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.5-27)
6. Hood release handle (P.3-16)
7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10)
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch (P.2-29)
3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-4)
4. Triple meter (P.2-7)
8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14)
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Seat heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) or
Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-36)
9. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models)
(P.3-21)
10. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) switch
(if so equipped) (P.5-16)
11. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-17)
— Rear window defroster switch (P.2-29)
12. Audio system (P.4-24)
13. Power outlet (P.2-37)
14. Glove box (P.2-39)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SSI0653
3. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-32)
1. Ventilator (P.4-17)
2. Center display and multi-function control panel
(P.4-2)/Instrument pocket (P.2-38)
— Navigation system* (if so equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting buttons
(if so equipped) (P.4-6)
4. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-27)
5. Fuse box cover (P.8-20)
6. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-33)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) (P.4-74)
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
SSI0521
10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-5)
11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-5)
12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-7)
13. Voltmeter (P.2-7)
14. Clock (P.2-7, P.2-23)
SSI0509
1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-20)
2. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)
7. Vehicle information display (P.2-16)
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)
3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-8)
4. Tachometer (P.2-5)
9. Transmission position indicator (if so equipped)
(P.2-12)
— SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator
(if so equipped) (P.5-16)
5. Speedometer (P.2-5)
6. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-32)
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the display:
3
*
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob
changes the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer:
3
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob
for more
*
than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.
SIC3973
SIC3974
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
1
*
engine into the red zone
.
CAUTION
Odometer/twin trip odometer
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
1
2
The odometer
and twin trip odometer
*
*
are displayed when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. If the engine is
overheated, continued operation of the
vehicle may seriously damage the en-
gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-
HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC3975
SIC3976
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-
perature.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the gauge points within the
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers “E” (Empty).
1
zone
shown in the illustration.
*
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
The low fuel warning
appears on the
vehicle information display when the amount of
fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as
it is convenient, preferably before the gauge
reaches “E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches “E”.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
temperature is high may result in engine
damage.
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Voltmeter
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
2
position, the volt meter
indicates the battery
*
.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon
as possible. After a few driving trips,
voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates
the generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the
normal range (11 to 15 volts) while the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
the
light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by
a NISSAN dealer.
SIC4003
.
For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
later in this section.
Triple meter
1. Engine oil temperature gauge
Clock
3
If necessary, adjust the clock
screen of the vehicle information display. (See
“CLOCK” later in this section.)
on the setting
*
2. Voltmeter
3. Clock
TRIPLE METER
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock
will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the
time.
Engine oil temperature gauge
1
*
If the engine oil temperature gauge
indicates more than 2808F (1408C) while
driving, reduce the engine speed (RPM)
and drive at a slow speed.
When the engine oil temperature is high,
the engine protection mode, which helps
reduce the chance of engine damage,
could activate and automatically decrease
engine power. Driving while the engine oil
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Master warning light
Security indicator light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Transmission position indicator*
Cruise indicator light
Slip indicator light
Automatic transmission check warning light*
Brake warning light
Small light indicator light
Soft top indicator light (Roadster models)
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indi-
cator*
Charge warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
High beam indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Intelligent Key system warning light
Low tire pressure warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Rear fog light indicator light*
*: if so equipped
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off (if so equipped):
Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
played on the vehicle information display. (See
“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later in
this section.)
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and push the ignition switch to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on (if so equipped):
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system checked by
a NISSAN dealer.
,
or
,
,
,
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING LIGHTS
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary re-
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
earlier in this section.)
or
Brake warning light
or
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
the ABS is operational.
WARNING
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light comes on when the parking brake is
applied.
.
Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If
you judge it to be safe, drive care-
fully to the nearest service station
for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
light comes on while the engine is running with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
and perform the following:
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
.
.
Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re-
quire greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. (See “BRAKE AND CLUTCH
FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.)
Automatic transmission check
warning light (if so equipped)
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the
light comes on at any other time, it may indicate
the transmission is not functioning properly.
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair
the transmission.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
functioning properly.
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Charge warning light
After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light
illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
Intelligent Key system warning light
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The low tire pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
This light warns of a malfunction with the
electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent
Key system.
Engine oil pressure warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
stopped, it may be impossible to free the
steering lock or to start the engine. If the light
comes on while the engine is running, you can
drive the vehicle. However in these cases,
contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as
possible.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.)
Low tire pressure warning light
TPMS malfunction:
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1
CAUTION
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
Running the engine with the engine oil
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while driv-
ing after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
correctly.
.
Be sure to install the specified size
of tires to the four wheels correctly.
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Master warning light
WARNING
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after the 1 minute. Con-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the master warning light illuminates if any of the
following are displayed on the vehicle informa-
tion display:
.
.
If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch pushed ON, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
.
.
.
.
.
No key warning
Low fuel warning
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with un-
der-inflated tires may permanently
damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
Low washer fluid warning
Parking brake release warning
Door/rear hatch open warning
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later
in this section.
Seat belt warning light and chime
CAUTION
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
.
.
The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.
If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For 5 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the system does
not activate the warning light for the front
passenger.
not come on at all.
For AT models:
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental
Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat
belt may not function properly.
In the manual shift mode, when the transmission
does not shift to the selected gear due to the
transmission protection mode, the AT position
indicator light will blink and a buzzer will sound.
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-
TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section.
(See “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section for precautions on seat belt usage.
Cruise indicator light
WARNING
Cruise main switch indicator:
Supplemental air bag warning light
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag
systems and/or pretensioner system
will not operate in an accident. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
This light illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when
the main switch is pushed again. When the
cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the
cruise control system is operational. (See
“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
will illuminate. The air bag warning light will turn
off after about 7 seconds if the front air bag, side
air bag and curtain air bag systems and/or
pretensioner system are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner system need servicing, and
your vehicle must be taken to your nearest
NISSAN dealer.
Cruise malfunction:
INDICATOR LIGHTS
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the
engine is running, it may indicate the cruise
control system is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
Transmission position indicator
(if so equipped)
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, the indicator shows the transmission
position.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US
gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
damage the emission control system.
Front passenger air bag status
light
To reduce or avoid emission control system
damage:
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
The front passenger air bag status light (
),
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
located on the center of the instrument panel,
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not
ready for an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US
only)” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section.)
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
For front passenger air bag status light opera-
tion, see “NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator light may stop
blinking and remain on.
Operation:
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
High beam indicator light
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
This light comes on when the headlight high
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
selected.
.
Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate a potential emission control mal-
function.
vehicle. The
few driving trips. If the
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
light should turn off after a
light does not
The malfunction indicator light may also come on
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or
if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
.
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
Soft top indicator light (Roadster
models)
CAUTION
Operate the soft top with the engine
running to prevent a discharged battery.
The rear fog light indicator light illuminates when
the rear fog light is on. (See “FOG LIGHT
SWITCH” later in this section.)
This light illuminates when the soft top is being
operated or it is stopped before reaching a full
open/close state. When the top is fully opened
or closed, the light will turn off.
When the soft top is operating, if any of the
above conditions are discontinued or any of the
following conditions are met, the top will stop
operating.
Security indicator light
The light blinks while the soft top is not fully
opened or closed under the following condi-
tions:
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
.
When the selector lever or shift lever is in
the R (Reverse) position.
.
.
When the vehicle is driven.
.
When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3
MPH (5 km/h) or more.
When the selector lever or shift lever is in
the R (Reverse) position.
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light
will remain on while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. For additional information, see
“SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.
.
.
When the battery voltage is extremely low.
Be sure to fully open or close the soft top when
driving the vehicle.
When the temperature of the soft top
system becomes extremely high.
The soft top can be moved with the soft top
operating switch only under all of the following
conditions:
Release the operating switch, and push it again
under the above conditions until the top is fully
opened or closed. The soft top indicator light will
turn off when the top operation is completely
finished.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting the driver that the vehicle is nearing its
traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.
.
.
.
.
When the vehicle is stopped.
When the ignition switch is ON.
When the trunk is closed.
If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the
ignition switch ON, it may indicate the electric
soft top control unit is not functioning properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
Small light indicator light
When the selector lever or shift lever is in a
position other than the R (Reverse) position.
The light illuminates when the headlight switch is
turned to the
position.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more details about the electric soft top
operation, see “SOFT TOP (Roadster models)”
in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section.
vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode
is operating, for example the vehicle dynamic
control system may not be functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an abnormality occurs in the system, the
vehicle dynamic control system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For
additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC
CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime will sound if the vehicle speed is above
4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.
Brake pad wear warning
SynchroRev Match mode
(S-MODE) indicator
(if so equipped)
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
This indicator will illuminate when the
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) is acti-
vated. (“SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) (if
so equipped for Manual Transmission models)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section)
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
A chime will sound if the driver side door is
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or
LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the
Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take
the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The light flashes when the turn signal switch
lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side door is
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic
control off switch is pushed to OFF. This
indicates that the vehicle dynamic control
system and traction control system are not
operating. When the vehicle dynamic control
off indicator light and slip indicator light come on
with the vehicle dynamic control system turned
on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the
opened with the light switch in the
or
position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF
or LOCK position.
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
SIC3977
1
*
The vehicle information display
warnings and information.
displays the
SIC3991
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
INDICATORS FOR OPERATION
1. Engine start operation indicator
This indicator appears when the selector lever is
in the P (Park) position.
2. Steering lock release malfunction
indicator
This indicator appears when the steering wheel
cannot be released from the LOCK position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this indicator appears, push the push-button
ignition switch while lightly turning the steering
wheel right and left.
inside the vehicle.
warning appears.
To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,
perform the following procedure:
Unregistered Intelligent Key:
The warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed from the LOCK position and the
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with an
unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent
Key.
3. Key insertion indicator
SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selector
lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the
ignition switch ? ignition switch position is
turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the
ignition switch ? ignition switch position is
turned to OFF)
This indicator appears when the key needs to be
inserted into the key port. (For example, the
Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)
If this indicator appears, insert the key into the
key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSH-
BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section.)
See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for
more details.
8. Intelligent Key battery discharge in-
dicator
4. Intelligent Key removal indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.
6. SHIFT “P” warning (Automatic Trans-
mission models)
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever
in any position except the P (Park) position.
This indicator appears when the driver’s door is
opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and the Intelligent Key placed in
the key port. A key reminder chime also sounds.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with
a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.)
If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent
Key from the key port and take it with you when
leaving the vehicle.
If this warning appears, move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position or push the ignition
switch to the ON position.
9. Engine start operation indicator
(Manual Transmission models)
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal
depressed.
5. NO KEY warning
This warning appears in either of the following
conditions.
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See
“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.)
No Intelligent Key inside the vehicle:
7. “PUSH” warning (Automatic Trans-
mission models)
This warning appears when the selector lever is
moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition
switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”
The warning appears when the door is closed
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
the empty (E) position.
3. Low washer fluid warning
This warning appears when the washer tank fluid
is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.
(See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
4. Door/rear hatch/trunk open warning
(ignition switch is in the ON position)
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or
the rear hatch/trunk are open or not closed
securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door
is open on the display.
5. “Time to rest” indicator
This indicator appears when the set “time to
rest” indicator activates. You can set the time for
up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in
this section.)
6. Low outside temperature warning
SIC4027
This warning appears if the outside temperature
is below 378F (38C). The warning can be set not
to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later
in this section.)
2. Low fuel warning
WARNINGS AND ALERTS
This warning appears when the fuel level in the
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches the empty (E) position.
1. Parking brake release warning
This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is
applied.
7. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE)
warning
This warning appears if a system malfunction
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
occurs. When the warning appears, the S-
MODE function will not operate, but the manual
transmission will operate normally and driving
can be continued. Have the system checked by
a NISSAN dealer.
2. Oil filter replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset
the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See
“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)
3. Tire replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing tires. You can set or reset the
distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-
PUTER” later in this section.)
4. “OTHER” indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil
filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance
for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPU-
TER” later in this section.)
More maintenance reminders are also available
on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE
INFO BUTTON” in the “4. Center display,
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section.)
SIC4237
INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time comes
for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset
the distance for changing the engine oil. (See
“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel
consumption and speed ? Elapsed time and
trip odometer ? Distance to empty ? Outside
air temperature ? Setting ? Warning check
SIC3978
SIC3673
Current fuel consumption (MPG or l
TRIP COMPUTER
(liter)/100 km)
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption.
Switches for the trip computer are located on
the left side of the combination meter panel. To
operate the trip computer, push the switches as
shown above.
A
*
ENTER switch
B
NEXT switch
*
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
A
*
selected by pushing the
switch
.
A
Each time the switch
is pushed, the
*
display will change as follows:
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed:
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is
B
done by pushing the
switch
for longer
*
than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is
also reset at the same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The
first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
“——”.
SIC3674
SIC4226
Average fuel consumption (MPG or l
(liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)
Elapsed time and trip odometer (MILES
or km)
Fuel consumption:
Elapsed time:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
The elapsed time mode shows the time since
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
B
B
Resetting is done by pushing the
switch
by pushing the
switch
for longer than
*
*
for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is
also reset at the same time.)
1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the
same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “——”.
Trip odometer:
The trip odometer mode shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven since the
last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the
B
switch
for longer than 1 second. (The
*
elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pushed to the OFF position may continue to
be displayed.
.
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-
rily change the display.
SIC3676
SIC4037
Distance to empty (MILES or km)
Outside air temperature (8F or 8C)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
8C in the range of −22 to 1318F (−30 to 558C).
The outside air temperature mode includes a low
temperature warning feature. If the outside air
temperature is below 378F (38C), the warning
“ICY” is displayed on the screen.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is
displayed on the screen.
The outside temperature sensor is located in
front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
by road or engine heat, wind directions and
other driving conditions. The display may differ
from the actual outside temperature or the
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
boards.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to “——”.
.
If the amount of fuel added is small, the
display just before the ignition switch is
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to the previous or next hour.
ALERT:
Alert menu can be set to notify the following
items.
MAINTENANCE:
The maintenance intervals of the following items
can be set or reset for the reminders.
.
UPSHIFT
.
.
.
.
OIL
Select this submenu to set the engine speed
(RPM) of the upshift indicator. (See “Upshift
indicator (if so equipped for Manual Trans-
mission models)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for changing the engine oil.
FILTER
.
.
TIMER
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for replacing the oil filter.
Select this submenu to specify when the
“TIME TO REST” indicator activates.
SIC3992
TIRE
ICY
Select this submenu to set or reset the
distance for replacing tires.
Setting
Setting cannot be made while driving. A
message “Setting can only be operated
when stopped” is also displayed on the
vehicle information display.
Select this submenu to display the low
outside temperature warning.
OTHER
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Select this submenu and set or reset the
distance for replacing items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires.
A
B
*
The
switch
and
switch
are
*
CLOCK:
used in the setting mode to select and decide a
menu.
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Clock adjustment can be set on this menu.
SKIP:
.
SETTING
OPTIONS:
A
Push the
warning check mode.
switch
to move to the
*
Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the
clock on the triple meter.
The 3 option menus can be set to your
preference.
B
*
Push the
switch
to select other menus.
.
RESET
Select this submenu to set the time quickly
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
LANGUAGE
SKIP:
Select this submenu to choose English or
French for display.
A
Push the
warning check mode.
switch
to move to the
*
UNIT
B
Push the
switch
to select other menus.
*
Select this submenu to choose the unit from
US or METRIC.
DETAIL:
This item is available only when a warning is
displayed.
EFFECTS
Select this menu to set the dial effects
described below to on or off.
Select this menu to see the details of warnings.
— The indicator needles sweep in the
meters when the engine is started.
SIC3993
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Warning check
To see if there are any of the following warnings
and corresponding details, select this menu.
.
.
.
.
.
No key warning
Low fuel warning
Low washer fluid warning
Parking brake release warning
Door/rear hatch open warning
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)
in the vehicle, and always lock it when un-
attended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification markers,
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.
Check with your insurance company to see if
you may be eligible for discounts for various
theft protection features.
SIC2045
SIC2132
Your vehicle has two types of security systems,
as follows:
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
.
.
Vehicle security system
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open.
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
4. Close all doors, hood and rear hatch/trunk.
Lock all doors and trunk (Roadster models).
The doors can be locked with the Intelligent
Key, door handle request switch, power
door lock switch or mechanical key.
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,
hood or rear hatch when the system is armed. It
is not, however, a motion detection type system
that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
5. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security indicator light stays
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
security system is now pre-armed. After
about 30 seconds the vehicle security
system automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The security light begins to flash
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not
arm.
hatch without using the button on the
Intelligent Key, the door handle request
switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the
door is opened by releasing the door inside
lock knob, the alarm will activate.)
da. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
.
Opening the hood.
How to stop an activated alarm
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key,
the door handle request switch or using the
mechanical key. The alarm will not stop if the
ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON
position.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors, hood and rear hatch locked
with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. When pushing the ignition switch
to the ACC or ON position, the system will
be released.
If the system does not operate as de-
scribed above, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the follow-
ing alarm:
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these
keys in the vehicle.
.
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
.
The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT)
The alarm is activated by:
Unlocking the door or opening the rear
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
service as soon as possible. Please bring
all Intelligent Keys that you have when
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
SIC2045
Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on the
meter panel. It indicates the status of the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
The light blinks after the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This function
indicates the security systems equipped on the
vehicle are operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the factory default setting. To turn this
function on and off, see “HOW TO USE
SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Center dis-
play, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” section.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
2
Low — continuous low speed operation
*
3
*
High — continuous high speed operation
4
Push the lever up
to have one sweep
*
operation of the wiper.
5
Pull the lever toward you
to operate the
*
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC3787
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
*
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward
*
B
*
(Slower) or
(Faster).
When the speed sensing wiper interval
function (for models with navigation system)
is turned on, the intermittent operation
speed varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed. (For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation
speed will be faster.)
Note that the function is set to disabled as
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
XENON HEADLIGHTS
1
and push the switch
on. The indicator light
*
WARNING
2
will come on. Push the switch again to turn
*
the defroster off.
HIGH VOLTAGE
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
minutes.
.
.
When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent
an electric shock, never attempt to
modify or disassemble. Always have
your xenon headlights replaced at a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
.
.
When cleaning the inner side of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the rear window
defroster.
Xenon headlights provide consider-
ably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver
ahead of you and cause a serious
accident. If headlights are not aimed
correctly, immediately take your ve-
hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have
the headlights adjusted correctly.
SIC3980
Type A
Do not use the rear window defros-
ter switch while the soft top is being
operated or fully opened. The heat
may damage the top material and/
or components (for Roadster mod-
els).
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
.
The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
SIC3979
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B
Instruments and controls 2-29
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced.
.
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
SIC3994
SIC3995
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
1
Turn the switch to the
position:
*
To set the autolight system:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
plate and instrument lights will come on.
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
1
*
AUTO position
.
2
*
Turn the switch to the
position:
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF,
or
position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
automatically when it is dark and turn off the
headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay:
You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
seconds after you push the ignition switch to
OFF and open any door then close all the doors.
You can adjust the period of the automatic
headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to
180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45
seconds.
SIC3784A
SIC3996
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
Headlight beam select
A
*
photo sensor
located on the top of the
For automatic headlights off delay setting, see
“Light Off Delay” in the “4. Center display,
heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section.
1
*
To select the low beam, put the lever in the
neutral position as shown.
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.
2
*
To select the high beam, push the lever
forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select the low beam.
3
*
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the
headlight high beam even when the head-
light switch is in the OFF position.
Battery saver system
A chime will sound when the driver side door is
opened with the light switch in the
or
position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF
or LOCK position.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the headlight switch is in the
or
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position while the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the lights will automatically turn off 5
minutes after the ignition switch has been
pushed to the OFF position.
position or in the
headlight switch to the
illumination when driving at night.
position. Turn the
position for full
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
once the parking brake is released. The daytime
running lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position.
When the headlight switch remains in the
or
position after the lights automatically
turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
When you turn on the headlight
switch again after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will not
turn off automatically. Be sure to
turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, other-
wise the battery will be discharged.
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
SIC3981
Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control operates
when the headlight control switch is in the
,
or AUTO position (with the autolights
activated).
A
*
B
*
Push the upper
or lower
switch to
Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the
headlights turn off automatically.
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights when
driving at night.
Daytime running light system (Canada
only)
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
SIC3997
SIC4066
SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn on the rear fog light, turn the headlight
1 Turn signal
*
switch to the
light switch to the
position, then turn the fog
position.
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
signals cancel automatically.
WARNING
The switch returns to the OFF position auto-
matically, and the rear fog light will illuminate.
.
.
If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off the
road.
2 Lane change signal
*
Make sure the indicator light on the instrument
panel illuminates.
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where lights begin flashing.
Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the high-
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
to other traffic.
To turn off the rear fog light, turn the fog light
switch to the
position again.
Make sure the indicator light on the instrument
panel turns off.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HORN
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
.
Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are
on.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
those body parts in contact with the
seat. Use of the seat heater by such
people could result in serious injury.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
CAUTION
SIC3982
.
.
.
The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
.
Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
damage to the heater.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
indicator light turns off.
.
.
.
Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately
with a dry cloth.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the switch.
If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SIC2770
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
The switches located on the center console can
be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select the desired heat range.
.
.
.
For high heat, push the HI side of the
1
*
switch
.
For low heat, push the LO side of the
2
*
switch
.
3
The indicator light
will illuminate
*
when the heater is on.
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to
the level position. Make sure that the
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if
so equipped)
3. Adjust the desired amount of the air using
.
Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
damage to the climate controlled
seat.
A
*
the control knob
.
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or
cooled, and/or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the control knob to the OFF
B
position (center). The indicator light
the control knob goes off at the OFF
position.
on
*
.
.
Any liquid spilled on the seat should
be removed immediately with a dry
cloth.
To check the air filter for the climate
controlled seat, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The climate controlled seat has air
filters. Do not operate the climate
controlled seat without the air fil-
ters. This may result in damage to
the system.
CAUTION
SIC2771
.
Do not place objects in front of the
intake inlets located behind and
under the front seat. Doing so could
cause improper operation or inter-
ruption of the operation.
.
.
When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.
The climate controlled seat warms up or cools
down the front seats by blowing warm or cool air
from the surface of the seat. The switches
located on the center console can be operated
independently of each other.
If any malfunctions are found or the
climate controlled seat does not
operate, turn the switch off and
.
.
.
The battery could run down if the
climate controlled seat is operated
while the engine is not running.
The surface temperature of the climate con-
trolled seats is automatically controlled at an
optimum temperature. However, adjust the
temperature using the control knob if the seats
are too hot or cold.
have the system checked by
NISSAN dealer.
a
Do not use the climate controlled
seat for extended periods or when
no one is using the seat.
1. Start the engine.
Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
A
2. Turn the control knob
to the heat side
2
. The indicator
*
1
or to the cool side
*
*
B
*
light
on the control knob will illuminate.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLET
The power outlet is located in the center console
and on the lower glove box.
CAUTION
.
.
The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
.
.
Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
SIC4004
SIC3984
Center console
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
driving conditions.
Avoid using power outlet when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
.
.
This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may blow.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
.
.
Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical acces-
sory being used is turned OFF.
switch. The
indicator will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE
DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.)
When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water to
SIC3985
Lower glove box
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
contact the outlet.
CAUTION
.
.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
SIC3987
INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for na-
vigation system equipped models)
1
*
To open the lid, push the knob up
To close, push the lid down.
.
WARNING
Keep the pocket lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC4071
SIC3988
SIC3999
A cup holder is located on the center console.
Soft bottle holder
GLOVE BOX
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Do not use bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly
injure people during sudden braking
or an accident.
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
1
*
To open the glove box, pull the handle
.
Do not use bottle holder for open
liquid containers.
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
2
3
To lock
/unlock
the glove box, use the
*
*
mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,
see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Keep the rear parcel box lid closed
while driving to help prevent injury in an
accident or a sudden stop.
SIC4070
SIC3989
CONSOLE BOX
REAR PARCEL BOX
1
*
To open the console box, push the button
and pull up the lid.
The rear parcel box is located behind the right-
side seat.
To close, push the lid down until latched.
To open the rear parcel box, pull the upper part
1
*
2
*
of the lid to position
or
.
To remove the rear parcel box, pull the lid to
3
position
with a greater force until it
*
unlatches. And then, pull the rear parcel box to
4
*
direction
.
To install, make sure the two hinges of the rear
parcel box engaged with the holders, then
perform the steps above in the reverse order.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
.
Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint top tether strap is da-
maged.
— If the cargo cover contacts the
top tether strap when it is at-
tached to the top tether anchor,
remove the cargo cover from the
vehicle or secure it on the cargo
floor below its attachment loca-
tion. If the cargo cover is not
removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
SIC3990
To remove the cargo cover unit, stow the cover
2
*
and pull the holder
to the opposite side.
WARNING
— Do not allow cargo to contact
the top tether strap when it is
attached to the top tether an-
chor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that con-
tacts the top tether strap may
damage the top tether strap
during a collision.
.
Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any
object on it could cause an injury
in an accident or sudden stop.
SIC4026
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
.
.
Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo
area hidden from the outside.
To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
1
*
sides on the hooks
the rear hatch.
located on the inside of
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
.
.
Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the win-
dow lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols and become trapped in the
window. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
SIC3286
SIC3241
Main power window switch (driver’s
Passenger side power window switch
side)
The passenger side switch will open or close
only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.
1. Driver side window
2. Front passenger side window
3. Window lock button
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to
the OFF position. If the driver’s or front
passenger’s door is opened during this period
of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is
canceled.
A
To open or close the window, push down
or
*
B
*
pull up
the switch and hold it. The main
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.
Locking passengers’ window
The power window switches will be deactivated
during soft top operation (Roadster models).
C
When the lock button
is pushed in, only the
*
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto reverse function
Automatic window lowering (Roadster
models)
WARNING
When the soft top operating switch is pressed,
the power windows will automatically be low-
ered completely. The windows do not rise
automatically after the soft top open/close
operation is completed. Use the power window
switches to raise them.
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
Automatic adjusting function
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be
immediately lowered.
CAUTION
When the battery cable is removed from
the battery terminal, do not close either
of the front doors. The automatic win-
dow adjusting function will not work
and the side roof panel may be da-
maged.
SIC3288
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
pushed to the OFF position.
Automatic operation
To fully open or close the window, completely
push down or pull up the switch and release it; it
need not be held. The window will automatically
open or close all the way. To stop the window,
just push or lift the switch in the opposite
direction.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window
occurs.
The power window has an automatic adjusting
function. When the door is being opened, the
window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid
contact between the window and the side roof
panel. When the door is closed, the window is
automatically raised slightly.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the
window to open or close until the switch is
released.
While the automatic adjusting function does not
work, the window will be controlled as follows:
.
When the door is opened, the window
lowers for approximately 2 seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
.
While the door is open, the window cannot
be raised.
If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the power
window system.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the door.
3. Open the window completely by operating
the power window switch.
SIC4239
SIC4238
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
MAP LIGHTS
The interior light control switch has three
positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on
or off.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
ON position
1
*
When the switch is in the ON position
map lights will illuminate.
the
6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other
windows.
DOOR position
If the power window automatic function does
not operate properly after performing the pro-
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
2
When the switch is in the DOOR position
,
*
the map lights will illuminate under the following
conditions:
.
ignition switch is switched to the OFF or
LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
.
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-
LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door
handle request switch with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
OFF position
3
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
*
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
CAUTION
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
SIC3869
The lights will also turn off after 30
minutes when the lights remain illumi-
nated after the ignition switch has been
pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when
the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
The lights will also turn off after 30
minutes when the lights remain illumi-
nated to prevent the battery from becom-
ing discharged.
When the auto interior illumination is set to the
OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION
AND SETTINGS (models with navigation sys-
tem)” in the “4. Center display, heater, air
conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section), the lights will illuminate under
the following condition:
.
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in any position
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARGO AREA COURTESY LIGHT
(Roadster models)
CARGO LIGHT (Coupe models)
TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models)
The light illuminates simultaneously with the map
light. See “INTERIOR LIGHTS” earlier in this
section.
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light
will turn off.
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light
turns off.
The light will also turn off after 30 minutes
when the light remains illuminated after
the ignition switch has been pushed to the
OFF or LOCK position to prevent the
battery from becoming discharged.
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HomeLink® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
1996) have “rolling code protection”. To pro-
gram a garage door opener equipped with
“rolling code protection”; you will need to use
a ladder to get up to the garage door opener
motor to be able to access the “smart or learn”
program button.
reverse features as required by
federal safety standards. (These
standards became effective for
opener models manufactured after
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the
path of a closing garage door and
then automatically stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
.
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
.
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
connected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-
gramming.
.
.
During programming procedure,
your garage door or security gate
may open or close. Make sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door, gate, etc. that you are
programming.
Once HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
programmed, retain the original transmit-
ter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, see “PRO-
GRAMMING HomeLink®” later in this sec-
tion.
Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to
operate a garage door, gate, or entry door
opener, home or office lighting, you need to be
at the same location as the device. Note:
Garage door openers (manufactured after
WARNING
.
Do not use HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and
Instruments and controls 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
activate.
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train Home-
Link®, completing the programming may
require a ladder and another person for
convenience.
6. Push and release the program button
located on the garage door opener’s motor
to activate the “training mode”. This button is
usually located near the antenna wire that
hangs down from the motor. If the wire
originates from under a light lens, you will
need to remove the lens to access the
training button.
SIC3612
SIC3613
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer Home-
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and
hold both the HomeLink® button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter
button.
Link® buttons (to clear the memory) until the
A
indicator light
blinks (after 20 seconds).
*
NOTE:
Release both buttons.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
Once you have pushed and released
the training button on the garage door
opener’s motor and the “training light”
is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to
perform step 7. For convenience, use
the help of a second person to assist
when performing this step.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 in (20 to 70 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink® flashes, changing from a
“slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could
take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator
light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapidly flashing light indicates
successful programming. To activate the
garage door or other programmed device,
push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button - releasing when the device begins to
7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and
releasing the garage door opener training
button) and firmly push and release the
HomeLink® button you have just pro-
grammed. Push and release the HomeLink®
2-48 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
button up to three times to complete the
training.
NOTE:
.
position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in
(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink®
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position
for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not
programmed within that time, try holding the
transmitter in another position - keeping the
indicator light in view at all times.
If programming a garage door opener, etc.,
it is advised to unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener com-
ponents.
8. Your HomeLink® button should now be
programmed. To program the remaining
HomeLink® buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVER-
SAL TRANSCEIVER
NOTE:
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed Home-
Link® buttons.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the
garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the
appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, please
refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.
homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-
FORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to
clear all programming, push and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (in approximately 20
seconds).
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO-
SIS
If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CA-
NADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after
2 seconds. To program your hand-held trans-
mitter to HomeLink®, continue to push and hold
the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through 4
under “Programming HomeLink®”) while you
push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-
gramming).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE Home-
Link® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
ver button, complete the following.
.
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
.
position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the Home-
Link® surface.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. Do not release the button until step
4 has been completed.
.
push and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127
Instruments and controls 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.
FCC Notice:
3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This
device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
buttons.
The transmitter has been tested and
complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the device.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the
manufacturer or dealer of those devices for
additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ............................................................... 3-2
Intelligent Key................................................ 3-2
Valet hand-off................................................ 3-3
Doors.............................................................. 3-4
Trunk release power cancel switch ................... 3-19
Interior trunk lid release ................................. 3-20
Secondary trunk lid release ............................ 3-21
Soft top (Roadster models) ................................ 3-21
Opening the top .......................................... 3-25
Closing the top............................................ 3-26
Opening the top using the Intelligent Key........... 3-26
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-27
If the top does not open or close electrically ...... 3-28
Care of the soft top and the vehicle body .......... 3-32
mechanical key .............................................. 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob ........................... 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5
Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-5
Intelligent Key system.......................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key operating range .......................... 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution .......................... 3-8
Intelligent Key operation................................... 3-9
Battery saver system..................................... 3-11
Warning signals........................................... 3-11
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-12
Remote keyless entry system .............................. 3-13
How to use remote keyless entry system ........... 3-13
Hood ............................................................ 3-16
Rear hatch (Coupe models)................................ 3-17
Rear hatch opener switch .............................. 3-17
Secondary rear hatch release.......................... 3-18
Trunk lid (Roadster models) ................................ 3-19
Trunk lid opener switch.................................. 3-19
Front, side and rear unique parts
(NISMO models).............................................. 3-32
Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-34
Opening the fuel-filler door............................. 3-34
Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-34
Tilt steering..................................................... 3-35
Manual operation ......................................... 3-36
Sun visors ...................................................... 3-36
Mirrors........................................................... 3-36
Inside mirror................................................ 3-36
Outside mirrors............................................ 3-38
Vanity mirror................................................ 3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN
does not record any key numbers so it is very
important to keep track of your key number plate.
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions
become canceled. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, this key can be
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when driving. The Intelli-
gent Key is a precision device with a
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-
ging it, please note the following.
SPA2406
— The Intelligent Key is water
resistant; however, wetting may
damage the Intelligent Key. If
the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is com-
pletely dry.
1. Intelligent Keys (2 sets)
2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2 sets)
3. Key number plate (1 set)
INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
against another object.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in a
place where temperatures ex-
ceed 1408F (608C).
— Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
near an electric appliance such
as a television set, personal
computer or cellular phone.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Key.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key
to come into contact with water
or salt water, and do not wash it
VALET HAND-OFF
in
a
washing machine. This
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the
mechanical key with you to protect your
belongings.
could affect the system function.
.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will
prevent the Intelligent Key from
unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, please con-
tact a NISSAN dealer.
To prevent the glove box from being opened
during valet hand-off, follow the procedures
below.
SPA2033
1. Push the trunk release power cancel switch
to the OFF side (Roadster models).
Mechanical key
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
telligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
3. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping
the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for
insertion into the Intelligent Key when you
retrieve your vehicle.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors, and glove box.
See “DOORS” later in this section and “STO-
RAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
See “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE
SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Center dis-
play, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” section.)
WARNING
.
Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping
to prevent persons from being
thrown from the vehicle. This also
helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
The driver’s door key operation also allows you
to open and close the window that is equipped
with the automatic open/close function. (See
“POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.)
.
.
Before opening any door, always
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
To open the window, turn the driver’s door key
cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the
window keeps opening while turning the key.
SPA2565
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously using the
mechanical key.
This function can also be performed by pushing
and holding the UNLOCK button on the
Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS EN-
TRY SYSTEM” later in this section.)
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
1
front of the vehicle
will lock all doors.
To close the window, turn the driver’s door key
cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second. The door is locked and the
window keeps closing while turning the key.
*
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
will unlock the
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
2
*
to the rear of the vehicle
3
neutral position
, turning it to the rear
*
again within 60 seconds will unlock all
doors.
.
You can switch the lock system to the mode
that allows you to open all the doors when
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
trunk, push the power door lock switch to the
2
*
unlock position
.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front
passenger) is moved to the lock position with
the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open,
all doors and the trunk lid will lock and unlock
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any
door open, all doors and the trunk lid will unlock
automatically and a chime will sound after the
door and/or the trunk lid are closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
SPA2566
SPA2300
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
To lock the door individually, move the inside
1
lock knob to the lock position
door.
then close the
Operating the power door lock switch will lock
or unlock all the doors and trunk lid. The
switches are located on the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrests.
*
.
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the
.
All doors unlock automatically when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
2
unlock position
.
*
To lock the doors and trunk lid, push the power
When locking the door without an Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelli-
gent Key inside the vehicle.
The automatic unlock function can be
deactivated or activated. To deactivate or
activate the automatic door unlock system,
perform the following procedure:
1
door lock switch to the lock position
with the
*
driver’s or front passenger’s door open, then
close the door and trunk lid.
When locking the door this way, be certain
not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the
vehicle.
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
To unlock the doors, the fuel-filler door and the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
CAUTION
WARNING
the
position (UNLOCK) for more than 5
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-
cle.
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft na-
vigation and communication sys-
t e m s . D o n o t o p e r a t e t h e
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
When the automatic door unlock system is
deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To
unlock the door manually, use the inside lock
knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side).
.
When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broad-
casting station.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door and rear hatch/trunk lid locks using the
remote controller function or pushing the re-
quest switch on the vehicle without taking the
key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key system operation.
.
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
computer.
ignition switch in the LOCK position is impos-
sible when the vehicle battery is completely
discharged. Pay special attention that the
vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
.
.
Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computer or
cellular phone.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
CAUTION
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
operate the vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-
er.
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the
Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace
the discharged battery with a new one as soon
as possible. For more details, see “PUSH-
BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section.
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
information about disabling the Intelligent Key
function, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as
signals from a TV and personal computer, the
battery life may become shorter.
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-
ligent Key.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is comple-
tely dry.
For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
Because the steering wheel is locked electri-
cally, unlocking the steering wheel with the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1
*
from each request switch
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors including the
rear hatch/trunk lid.
SPA2568
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
TION
.
Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the In-
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
SPA2567
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
.
.
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.
1
*
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing
doors with the door handle request switch)
can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHI-
CLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS
(models with navigation system)” in the “4.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems” sec-
tion.)
SPA2569
SPA2570
Coupe models
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out from your pocket or bag.
SPA2571
Coupe models
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lid can be locked with another registered
Intelligent Key.
Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and
fuel-filler door
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position
and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key
with you.*1
Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and
fuel-filler door
1. Push the door handle request switch (dri-
ver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch/
trunk request switch once while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/trunk
lid.*2
3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-
ver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch/
trunk request switch while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.*3
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once. The corresponding
door and the fuel-filler door or the rear
hatch/trunk lid will unlock.
4. All the doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and fuel-
filler door will lock.
SPA2680
3. Push the door handle request switch or the
rear hatch/trunk request switch again within
60 seconds.
Roadster models
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
outside chime sounds twice.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors and the rear hatch/
trunk lid by pushing the door handle request
A
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once again. All the doors
and the rear hatch/trunk lid will unlock.
*1: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will lock
with the Intelligent Key while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position.
switch (driver’s or front passenger’s)
or the
*
B
rear hatch/trunk request switch
*
within the
range of operation.
All doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid and the fuel-
filler door will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch while
the doors are locked.
*2: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not
lock with the Intelligent Key while any door
or the rear hatch/trunk lid is open.
When you lock or unlock the doors and the rear
hatch/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard
indicator and horn mode” later in this section.
*3: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not
lock by pushing the door handle request
switch or the rear hatch/trunk request switch
with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors and the rear hatch/trunk
.
Opening any door and/or the rear hatch/
trunk lid
.
.
Pushing the ignition switch
Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
gent Key port.
and
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.
.
.
All doors are closed, and
The selector lever is in the P (Park) position
(Automatic Transmission models).
WARNING SIGNALS
Opening rear hatch/trunk lid
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning displays in the vehicle
information display.
To open only the rear hatch/trunk lid, perform the
following procedure.
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the rear hatch/trunk lid opener switch
C
*
.
3. The rear hatch/trunk lid will open.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
displays, be sure to check the vehicle and
Intelligent Key.
Lockout protection:
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protec-
tion is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in
this section and “VEHICLE INFORMATION
DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent
Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will
sound and all doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid
will unlock.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for 60
minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the
power supply to prevent battery discharge.
.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Possible cause
Action to take
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display
and the inside warning chime sounds con-
tinuously (Automatic Transmission models).
When pushing the ignition switch
to stop the engine
The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
tion.
When opening the driver’s door
to get out of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent
Key port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display,
the outside chime sounds 3 times and the
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
inside warning chime sounds for approximately position.
a few seconds.
tion.
When closing the door after get-
ting out of the vehicle
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
and the outside chime sounds continuously
(Automatic Transmission models).
position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the
the P (Park) position.
OFF position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.
and cargo/trunk room area.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
and cargo/trunk room area.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely.
When pushing the door handle
request switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
A door is not closed securely.
When closing the trunk lid
(Roadster models)
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When shifting the selector lever
to the P (Park) position
The inside warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ON position. The ignition switch is in the OFF position.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent
Key will not operate when:
WARNING
.
the distance between the Intelligent Key and
the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pushed.
The FAA advises that the radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not operated
unintentionally when the unit is stored
during a flight.
.
the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
After locking with the remote keyless entry
function, pull the door handle to make sure the
doors are securely locked.
The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
depending on the environment. To securely
operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach
the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler
door, activate the panic alarm and open the
windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelli-
gent Key from outside the vehicle.
SPA2252B
1. LOCK button
2. UNLOCK button
3. PANIC button
Before locking the doors, make sure the
Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent
Key can operate at a distance of approximately
33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.)
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning the
purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys,
contact a NISSAN dealer.
When you lock or unlock the doors and rear
hatch/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and
the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard
indicator and horn mode” later in this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the UNLOCK
button on the
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
button.
Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and
fuel-filler door
Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All
the doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will
unlock.
Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent
Key.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position
and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key
with you.*1
The door window can be opened or closed by
turning the metal key in a door lock. (See
“DOORS” earlier in this section.)
All doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will be
locked automatically unless one of the following
operations is performed within 1 minute after
2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/trunk
lid.*2
1
*
3. Push the LOCK
Intelligent Key.
button
on the
Using panic alarm
pushing the UNLOCK
button on the
Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If
during this 1-minute time period, the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will be locked
automatically after another 1 minute.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the alarm to call attention as
follows:
4. All the doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid and
fuel-filler door will lock.
3
*
1. Push the PANIC
button
on the Key
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once.
for more than 1 second.
.
.
.
Opening any door
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
stay on for 25 seconds.
*1: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will lock
with the Intelligent Key while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Pushing the ignition switch
Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
gent Key port
3. The panic alarm stops when:
*2: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not
lock with the Intelligent Key while any door
or the rear hatch/trunk lid is open.
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or
Opening windows
Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key
are pushed. (Note: Panic button should
be pushed for more than 1 second.)
The UNLOCK
button operation also allows
Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and
fuel-filler door
you to open a window that is equipped with the
automatic open/close function. (See “POWER
WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
2
*
1. Push the UNLOCK
Intelligent Key once.
button
on the
To open the window, push the door UNLOCK
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
driver’s door and fuel-filler door will unlock.
2
button
on the Intelligent Key for about
*
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
3 seconds after the door is unlocked.
1
*
LOCK
button
is pushed, the hazard
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
2
*
When the UNLOCK
button
is pushed,
the hazard indicator flashes once.
DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
Intelligent Key system
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - once
(Using door handle or rear hatch/trunk request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
(Using
or
button)
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
twice. When the UNLOCK
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.
button is
Hazard indicator mode:
DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
(Using door handle or rear hatch/trunk request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - twice
HORN - none
HAZARD - none
HORN - none
(Using
or
button)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
Switching procedure:
To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)
1
operation, push the LOCK
and UN-
*
2
LOCK
buttons on the Intelligent Key
simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.
*
.
When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.
SPA2572
1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
*
located below the instrument panel; the
hood will then spring up slightly.
WARNING
.
.
Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.
2
2. Pull the lever
up at the front of the hood
*
with your fingertips and raise the hood.
3
*
3. Hold the insulator
of the support rod
4
*
and insert its end into the slot
front edge of the hood.
on the
If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
4. When closing the hood, store the support
rod to its original position, then slowly close
the hood and make sure it locks into place.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR HATCH (Coupe models)
WARNING
Do not drive with the rear hatch open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon monox-
ide)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
SPA2573
REAR HATCH OPENER SWITCH
The rear hatch can be opened by pushing the
rear hatch opener switch when the Intelligent
Key is within the operating range of the rear
hatch lock/unlock function regardless of the
inside lock knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT
KEY SYSTEM” earlier in this section.)
SPA2646
To close the rear hatch, push it down securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Firmly pull the release handle until the rear
hatch releases.
NISMO models
CAUTION
A
Do not use the rear spoiler * to open
or close the rear hatch. Doing so may
damage the rear spoiler.
B
*
Always hold area
hatch.
to open or close the rear
SPA2580
SECONDARY REAR HATCH RELEASE
The secondary rear hatch release mechanism
allows opening the rear hatch in the event of
discharged battery or emergency.
The release handle is located under the cargo
room floor. To open the rear hatch from the
passenger compartment, perform the following
procedure.
1. Remove the cargo floor mat.
1
*
2. Find the rear hatch release handle
shown in the illustration.
as
3. Free the release handle that is fixed with
velcro.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK LID (Roadster models)
WARNING
.
.
Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon mon-
oxide)” in the “5. Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
Closely supervise children when
they are around cars to prevent
them from playing and becoming
locked in the trunk where they could
be seriously injured. Keep the car
locked, with the trunk closed, when
not in use, and prevent children’s
access to Intelligent Keys.
SPA2692
SPA2681
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL
SWITCH
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the
trunk lid opener switch when the Intelligent Key
is within the operating range of the trunk lock/
unlock function regardless of the inside lock
knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYS-
TEM” earlier in this section.)
When the switch located inside the glove box is
A
in the OFF position
, the power to the trunk
*
lid will be canceled and the trunk lid cannot be
opened by the trunk lid opener or trunk request
switch.
When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet
and want to keep your belongings safe in the
glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF
and lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key
with the valet and keep the mechanical key with
you.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See “KEYS” earlier in this section.
become locked inside the trunk.
Releasing inside the trunk
To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the
B
*
switch to the ON
position.
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the
A
release handle
until the lock releases and
*
push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
A
The handle
is located inside the trunk
*
compartment as illustrated.
SPA2682
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk lid securely latched, when not in
use, and prevent children’s access to
Intelligent Keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism allows
opening of the trunk lid in the event that people
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOFT TOP (Roadster models)
SPA2683
SPA2685
Interior/exterior view
SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE
1. Soft top indicator light (on the combination meter)
2. Soft top operating switch
3. Top lock hole
BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP
The secondary trunk lid release mechanism
allows opening the trunk lid in the event of
discharged battery or emergency.
The soft top of this vehicle is electrically
operated. You can fully open or close the top
only by pressing the operating switch located on
the center console.
4. Soft top
5. Top storage lid
1. Open the rear parcel box.
6. Trunk lid
The soft top operating switch must be operated
under all of the following conditions:
7. Rear window
1
2
2. Remove the cap
with a suitable tool
.
*
*
3. Insert the key into the key cylinder and turn it
.
.
.
.
When the trunk is closed.
When the vehicle is stopped.
When the engine is running.
counterclockwise. The trunk lid will open.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
When the selector lever or shift lever is in a
position other than the R (Reverse) position.
it while moving. The top operating
system could also be damaged.
water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material.
.
.
Do not operate the top in a strong
wind. It could be blown by the wind,
striking someone or damage the
top.
.
Be sure to turn off the rear window
defroster switch. Never turn it on
while the top is being operated or
fully opened. The heat may damage
the top material.
CAUTION
Always keep the engine running while
operating the soft top. The top will also
operate when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, but run the engine to
prevent a discharged battery.
Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the top is being
operated.
Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and
all the warnings and cautions in this section.
Improper operation of the top could cause
a system malfunction, damage, or dete-
rioration of the top material and related
parts.
.
In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle with an open top.
Always use seat belts and proper
child restraints.
WARNING
CAUTION
.
.
Park the vehicle in a safe and level
place and apply the parking brake.
.
.
.
Do not operate the top when the
temperature is below 328F (08C).
This may result in damage to the
top material or operating system.
Make sure the area is clear of
obstacles and there is enough clear-
ance over the top (for example, in a
garage or a covered area). More
than approximately 6.6 ft (2 m) from
the ground is required to open or
close the top safely. Otherwise, the
top may damage any objects above
Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the top, and dry the
surface of the top completely before
opening it.
Do not open the top when it is wet
or damp. This may cause interior
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
there properly, and this could da-
mage the top and/or the vehicle
body.
.
.
Do not sit or place excessive weight
on the top and the storage lid,
especially when the top is being
operated. The top may be damaged.
Do not drive the vehicle with the top
partially opened. Always make sure
the top is either fully opened or
closed before driving.
.
.
.
Secure items so that they cannot be
blown from the vehicle while driving
with the top open.
SPA2691
SPA2706
WHEN OPERATING THE TOP
Do not operate the top manually
except for emergency cases. Manual
operation may damage the top.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
.
Do not place any objects between
the top cloth and the structure.
Doing so could interfere with top
operation and cause damage to the
top operating system or the objects.
Be sure to fully open or fully close
the top. Do not release the switch
half way through the roof opening
or closing process. If the top is only
partially opened, significant da-
mage to the top could occur.
Keep hands and other parts of the body
away from moving parts such as the
top, storage lid, side flap * and power
A
windows.
Do not place anything on the top
and the storage lid. Even small
items may interfere with the top
operation and could cause damage
to the top or the vehicle body.
CAUTION
Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before
operating the top.
Keep all parts of the top linkage clear of
obstructions, or the top latch may not
be securely locked.
Do not place anything in the top
storage area. The top will not fit
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Be sure to fully open or close the soft top when
driving the vehicle.
.
In case of low battery or low tempera-
ture, the top may temporarily stop
moving during the operation. This func-
tions to protect the top control me-
chanism, and it is not a malfunction.
When the soft top is operating, and any of the
following conditions occur, the top will stop
operating.
.
When the selector lever or shift lever is in
the R (Reverse) position.
.
If the top is opened and closed repeat-
edly in a short period of time or the top
operation is stopped while opening or
closing, the top operation may be
automatically stopped to protect the
system. Wait for approximately 5 min-
utes before operating the top again.
.
When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3
MPH (5 km/h) or more.
.
.
When the battery voltage is extremely low.
When the temperature of the soft top
system becomes extremely high.
SPA1691
Release the soft top operating switch, and push
the switch again to move the top to the fully
opened or closed position. The soft top indicator
light will turn off when the top operation is
completely finished.
Soft top indicator light
The soft top indicator light in the instrument
panel shows the conditions of top operation.
The light illuminates when the soft top is being
operated or if it is stopped before reaching the
fully opened or closed position. When the top is
fully opened or closed, the light will turn off.
If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the
ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated
or not, and when the top is engaged), it may
indicate the top operating system is not
functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
The light blinks while the soft top is not fully
opened or closed under the following condi-
tions:
.
.
When the vehicle is driven.
Automatic window lowering
When the selector lever or shift lever is in
the R (Reverse) position.
When the soft top operating switch is pressed,
the power windows will automatically be low-
ered completely. The windows do not rise
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
automatically after the top operation is com-
pleted. Use the power window switches to raise
them.
NOTE:
If you release the switch and press it again
while the top is being opened, the top will
slightly move to the closing direction, then
start moving to the opening direction
again. The top is designed to move in this
way. It is not a malfunction.
SPA2632
OPENING THE TOP
1. Start the engine.
2. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch
and hold it until the top is fully opened.
.
The soft top indicator light will illuminate
while the top is in motion. (In about 20
seconds, the opening movement will
finish and the indicator light turns off.)
.
Windows will automatically be fully
opened.
3. Release the switch when the top is fully
opened. (The indicator light turns off.)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA2633
SPA2570
CLOSING THE TOP
1. Start the engine.
OPENING THE TOP USING THE IN-
TELLIGENT KEY
The soft top can be opened using the request
switch.
2. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating
switch and hold it until the top is fully closed.
Opening the soft top
.
The soft top indicator light will illuminate
while the top is in motion. (In about 20
seconds, the closing movement will
finish.)
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and
make sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or
A
passenger’s)
fully open.
and hold it until the soft top is
*
.
Windows will automatically be fully
opened.
3. Release the switch when the top is fully
closed. (The indicator light will turn off.)
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
If the soft top stops halfway during operation or does not operate normally, follow the procedures shown in the following table. If the procedures in the
following table do not solve the symptom, immediately contact a NISSAN dealer for the inspection.
Symptom
Beep
Possible cause
Possible solution
The OPEN side of the soft top operating switch is Push the CLOSE side of the soft top operating
pushed while the soft top is fully open, or the
CLOSE side of the soft top operating switch is
pushed while the soft top is fully closed.
switch when the soft top is fully open. Push the
OPEN side of the soft top operating switch when the
soft top is fully closed.
Sounds twice
Shift the selector lever (automatic transmission
The selector lever (automatic transmission models models only) to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position, or
only) or the shift lever (manual transmission models shift the shift lever (manual transmission models only)
The OPEN side of the soft top operating
switch is pushed, but the soft top does not
operate.
Sounds twice
Sounds twice
only) is in the R (Reverse) position.
to the N (Neutral) position, and then operate the soft
top.
The trunk lid is opened.
Fully close the trunk lid.
Does not sound The battery voltage is low.
Start the engine again and operate the soft top.
Wait for approximately 5 minutes.
Does not sound The operation stops to protect the system.
Check that an object is not trapped inside the rear
Objects are trapped in the moving structure of the parcel shelf, side flap and soft top. After the check,
Sounds twice
Sounds twice
The soft top stops halfway during opera-
tion.
soft top.
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, start the
engine again and then operate the soft top.
The battery voltage is low.
Start the engine again and operate the soft top.
When the vehicle is being driven, the beep Sounds continu-
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe location and
fully open or fully close the soft top.
The soft top is partially opened.
sounds.
ously
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR
CLOSE ELECTRICALLY
WARNING
If you cannot operate the soft top with the
operating switch, first check whether all the
following operating conditions are met.
.
.
Do not drive with the top partially
opened.
If the top cannot be operated prop-
erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon
as possible to have your vehicle
checked.
.
.
vehicle is stopped
ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when
operating the top.)
.
.
the trunk is closed
CAUTION
the selector lever or shift lever is in a position
other than the R (Reverse) position
The storage lid is extremely heavy. The
storage lid should be manually opened
or closed by two people.
SPA2715
If the top still does not move under the above
conditions or has any system malfunction, see a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you
must close the top by yourself, in the event of
emergency or when an immediate dealer service
is not available, close the top manually accord-
ing to the procedures shown in this section.
1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of a
discharged battery, the secondary trunk
release mechanism should be operated.
(See “SECONDARY TRUNK LID RE-
LEASE” earlier in this section.)
2. Open the top storage lid
When closing the soft top manually:
2
a. Remove the board
inside of the
*
.
Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from
traffic.
1
trunk by removing the clips
.
*
b. Pull the lock release cables (right and
3
left)
as illustrated, then close the
.
Two people should perform this procedure,
as some of the top parts are extremely
heavy.
*
trunk lid.
NOTE:
Use a cloth or other tool to protect your
hands when pulling on the lock release
The top cannot be opened manually.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
*
cables
.
SPA2686
SPA2703
3. Close the soft top.
c. Pull up the storage lid from the left and
right side of the vehicle by hand.
a. Pull up the top simultaneously from the
right and left side of the vehicle while
holding the storage lid.
CAUTION
Make sure to close the trunk lid before
opening the storage lid. The storage lid
may contact the trunk lid and damage it.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
A
Make sure to hold the rear top * to
avoid the front and rear parts separat-
ing. Otherwise the top may be da-
maged.
SPA2704
SPA2705
A
b. When the rear top
is pulled up from
d. Pull down and slide the storage lid to
close while holding the rear soft top
from the right and left side of the vehicle.
*
the storage area, one person must hold
the storage lid and another person must
pull up the soft top.
c. Pull up the top using both hands,
A
*
holding the rear top
as illustrated.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Make sure to close the storage lid
completely. The storage lid may contact
the soft top and damage it.
SPA2688
SPA2689
4. Lock the front part of the soft top.
e. Close the front and rear parts of the soft
top at the same time as illustrated.
1
a. Remove the cap
as illustrated.
*
2
b. Insert a suitable tool
(located in the
*
trunk) into the hole and turn clockwise.
CAUTION
.
.
After closing the top manually, have
the system checked and/or repaired
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for
long periods or driving at high
speeds. The rear of the top is not
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRONT, SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE
PARTS (NISMO models)
.
.
A protective clear tape is applied to the top
storage lid painted surface where the soft
top contacts the surface. When the top is
fully closed, the tape may transmit some
light, visible from the inside of the vehicle.
This does not affect the water and air
tightness of the seal.
locked completely, and this may
allow wind and rain to get into your
vehicle.
CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE
VEHICLE BODY
To use your Roadster safely and comfortably,
you need to observe all the warnings and
cautions shown in the previous pages. Also, to
maintain a good appearance of the soft top and
the vehicle body, you need to care for them by
cleaning and/or washing properly.
The inner surface of the trunk and top
storage lids may show a fibrous, or marbled
pattern. This is the normal appearance of the
material used in these parts.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not use an automatic car wash or
a high-pressure car wash to clean
your vehicle. The top may be da-
maged and water may leak into the
inside of the vehicle.
Store the vehicle with the top closed
if it is not to be used for long
periods. Keeping the top stowed
for long periods may cause wrinkles
on the surface of the top.
See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-
pearance and care” section for detailed instruc-
tions.
SPA2647
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The NISMO models have the following unique
parts on the front, side and rear of the vehicle.
—
—
—
—
Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter
Side sill extensions
Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser
Large-diameter exhaust pipes
These parts are close to the ground and may be
damaged if they contact objects such as curbs,
parking blocks, etc.
CAUTION
SPA2648
SPA2649
Reduce vehicle speed to decrease the
possibility of damaging these parts
when:
CAUTION
CAUTION
.
.
driving on bumpy or rutted roads
The approach and departure angles are
small. Reduce vehicle speed when the
vehicle approaches or leaves a steep
hill. Otherwise, the front bumper with
an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper
with an aerodynamic diffuser and ex-
haust pipes may contact the road sur-
face and be damaged.
Do not step on the front bumper with an
aerodynamic splitter. Doing so could
damage it.
entering or exiting parking garages
and driveways
.
driving over speed bumps
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
lock all doors by operating the door handle
request switch, the LOCK button on the
Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the power
door lock switch.
injury. It could also cause the mal-
function indicator light to come on.
.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your vehi-
cle.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
Do not fill a portable fuel container
in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-
tricity can cause an explosion of
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death when
filling portable fuel containers:
WARNING
.
Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under certain
conditions. You could be burned or
seriously injured if it is misused or
mishandled. Always stop engine
and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
SPA2581
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler
door by using one of the following operations,
then push the left side of the door.
.
.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly
a fire.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
.
.
.
.
Push the door handle request switch with
the Intelligent Key carried with you.
— Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent
Key.
Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control sys-
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a
serious malfunction and possible
CAUTION
Insert the mechanical key into the door lock
cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle.
.
.
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
Push the power door lock switch to the
UNLOCK position.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Insert the cap straight into the fuel-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILT STEERING
filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-
en the fuel-filler cap properly may
WARNING
.
.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose control
of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent.
cause the
malfunction indicator
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to
Do not adjust the steering wheel
any closer to you than is necessary
for proper steering operation and
comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates
with great force. If you are unrest-
rained, leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way,
you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from
the air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far
away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the light does not turn
light
off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-
er.
SPA2582
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
A
Use the fuel-filler cap holder on the hook
*
while refueling.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
MIRRORS
SPA2583
SPA2447
MANUAL OPERATION
INSIDE MIRROR
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside
mirror to the desired position.
Tilt operation
Push the lock lever
steering wheel up or down to the desired
position.
1
*
down and adjust the
Pull the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
SIC2872
1. To block out glare from the front, swing
1
*
down the main sun visor
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
2
*
swing it to the side
.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
*
light will turn off. Push the “I” switch
the system on.
to turn
Do not allow any object to cover the
E
sensors
or apply glass cleaner on
*
them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensor, resulting in improper opera-
tion.
For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver opera-
tion, see “HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEI-
VER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
SPA2143
SPA2450
Manual anti-glare type
Automatic anti-glare type
1
The night position
will reduce glare from the
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically changes reflection according to
the intensity of the headlights of the following
vehicle.
*
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
*
The anti-glare system will be automatically
turned on when the ignition switch is pushed
to the ON position.
WARNING
Use the night position only when ne-
cessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
When the anti-glare system is turned on, the
A
*
indicator light
will illuminate and excessive
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind
you will be reduced.
C
Push the “*” switch
to make the inside
*
rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Turn the switch right or left to select the right or
1
*
left side mirror
, then adjust using the control
2
switch
.
*
Defrosting outside mirrors
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
window defroster switch is operated.
SPA2319
SPA1829
Foldable outside mirrors
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located on
the armrest.
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Center display, heater, air conditioner,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer (models without navigation system) ....... 4-41
Center multi-function control panel
(models with navigation system) ............................ 4-2
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player (models with navigation system).............. 4-45
DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC) player
USB memory operation
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-52
Bluetooth® streaming audio
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-56
iPod® player operation
How to use multi-function controller ................... 4-3
How to select menus on the screen ................... 4-6
Vehicle information and settings
(models with navigation system) ............................ 4-6
How to use STATUS button.............................. 4-6
How to use brightness control and display ON/
OFF button................................................... 4-6
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-61
Music box hard-disk drive
How to use INFO button.................................. 4-6
How to use SETTING button .......................... 4-10
Ventilators ...................................................... 4-17
Center ventilators......................................... 4-17
Side ventilators............................................ 4-17
Heater and air conditioner .................................. 4-17
Automatic air conditioner (Type A).................... 4-18
Automatic air conditioner (Type B/Type C) ......... 4-21
Operating tips ............................................. 4-23
In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-23
Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-24
Audio system .................................................. 4-24
Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-24
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player ..... 4-36
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-63
Auxiliary input jacks
(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-69
CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning .......... 4-70
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ........ 4-71
Antenna ..................................................... 4-73
Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-74
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(models with navigation system) .......................... 4-74
Regulatory information................................... 4-75
Voice commands.......................................... 4-76
Control buttons ........................................... 4-76
Connecting procedure................................... 4-77
Phone selection ........................................... 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle phonebook ....................................... 4-77
Making a call............................................... 4-80
Receiving a call ........................................... 4-81
During a call ............................................... 4-82
List of voice commands ................................. 4-91
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-94
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-97
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(models with navigation system) .......................... 4-98
NISSAN voice recognition standard mode.......... 4-98
Using the system ....................................... 4-100
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(models without navigation system) ...................... 4-85
NISSAN voice recognition alternate command
mode ...................................................... 4-110
Using the system ....................................... 4-116
Troubleshooting guide ................................. 4-121
Regulatory information................................... 4-86
Using the system ......................................... 4-87
Control buttons ........................................... 4-89
Getting started ............................................ 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTROL PANEL (models with
navigation system)
SAFETY NOTE
WARNING
.
.
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
.
.
In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell
coming from it, stop using the
system immediately and contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-
ing such conditions may lead to
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
SAA2273
1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-6)
2, 3, 7, 8, 9.
For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)
4. Multi-function controller (P.4-3)
5. “PHONE” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
button (P.4-74)
Park the vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake to view
the images on the front center dis-
play screen using devices connected
to the auxiliary input jacks.
6.
“
OFF” brightness control and display ON/
OFF button (P.4-6)
10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button
(P.4-6)
11. “SETTING” button (P.4-10)
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
tions may result in system malfunctions.
4-2 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN
To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot
be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
CAUTION
.
The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if it is hit
with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains
a small amount of mercury. In case
of contact with skin, wash immedi-
ately with soap and water.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
WARNING
.
.
ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted,
you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
.
To clean the display, use a soft, dry
cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-
cessary, use a small amount of
neutral detergent with a soft cloth.
Never use a rough cloth, alcohol,
benzine, thinner or any kind of
solvent or paper towel with a che-
mical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
SAA2274
HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION
CONTROLLER
Choose an item on the display using the main
2
directional buttons
(or additional directional
*
3
*
buttons
with navigation system) or center
, and push the ENTER button
5
1
dial
for
*
*
operation.
.
Do not splash any liquid such as
water or car fragrance on the dis-
play. Contact with liquid will cause
the system to malfunction.
4
Push the BACK button
to return the display
*
to the previous screen or delete characters.
Pushing BACK may or may not save the settings
depending on the menu.
6
For the VOICE button
functions, refer to the
*
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2473
SAA2474
SAA2475
Touch screen operation
Adjusting an item:
Inputting characters:
With this system, the same operations as those
for the multi-function controller are possible
using the touch screen operation.
1
*
2
*
1
Touch the +
settings.
or −
button to adjust the
Touch the letter or number
.
*
There are some options available when inputting
3
4
Touch the
or
button to move
characters.
*
*
Selecting the item:
to the previous or next item.
.
.
.
Uppercase:
Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio”
settings, touch the “Audio” area
screen.
5
6
*
Touch the
or
button to move
*
1
on the
*
Shows uppercase characters.
Lowercase:
to the previous or next page.
2
*
Touch the BACK
previous screen.
button to return to the
Shows lowercase characters.
Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).
4-4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Space:
Inserts a space.
Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Push and hold the
button to delete all of the characters.
.
OK:
Completes character inputs.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe
the screen.
SAA2143
SAA2476
Available items
MENU OPTIONS
The start menu can be displayed using the menu
control switch on the steering-wheel-mounted
controls.
Destination/Route:
These items are for the navigation system. See
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual for details.
1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is
displayed, push and hold the menu control
switch until the “Menu Options” screen
appears.
Info:
Displays the information screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the INFO
button.
2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the
menu control switch up or down, and then
push the menu control switch to select it.
Settings:
Displays the settings screen. It is the same
screen that appears when you push the SET-
TING button.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND
SETTINGS (models with navigation
system)
2. Menu Selections:
HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen.
To display the status of the audio, air conditioner
system, fuel consumption and navigation sys-
tem, push the STATUS button. The following
information will appear when the STATUS button
is pushed repeatedly.
3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:
Shows that the multi-function controller may
be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen
and select more options.
Audio and Air conditioner system ? Audio and
fuel economy ? Audio and Navigation system
4. Menu Items Counter:
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-
TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
Shows the total number of items listed
across all pages for the current menu (i.e.
3/7).
Push the “
OFF” button to switch the
display brightness to the daytime mode or the
nighttime mode, and to adjust the display
brightness using the multi-function controller
while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
SAA2477
5. Footer/Information Line:
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted. (i.e. Adjust head lamp on time after
shut-off.)
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display
screen in menus. To select each key item,
highlight the preferred item using the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER button.
The display brightness can also be adjusted
using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-
ness DOWN button (−).
Push and hold the “
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the
button again to turn the display on.
OFF” button for more
Whenever a menu selection is made or menu
item is highlighted, different areas on the screen
provide you with important information. See the
following for details.
HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON
1. Header:
The display screen shows vehicle and navigation
information for your convenience.
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen. (i.e. push SETTING button >
choose “Comfort” menu item.)
The information shown on the screen should be
4-6 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.
.
Navigation Version
SAA2478
Vehicle information display
1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.
2. Select an item from the INFO menu.
3. After viewing or adjusting the information on
the following screens, push the BACK
button to return to the INFO menu.
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for the following items:
.
.
.
.
Where am I?
Traffic Info
Weather Info
Map Update
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Economy information
The distance to empty, average fuel economy
and current fuel economy will be displayed for
reference.
To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel
Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” key.
If the “Fuel Eco History” key is selected, the
average fuel consumption history will be dis-
played in graph form along with the average for
the previous Reset-to-Reset period.
The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” later in this section.)
SAA2481
SAA2479
The fuel economy information may differ from the
information displayed on the vehicle information
display. This is due to the timing difference in
updating the information and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Maintenance information
The maintenance intervals can be displayed for
the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other reminders.
To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred
item from the list.
You can also set to display a message to remind
you that the maintenance needs to be per-
formed.
The following example shows how to set the
engine oil maintenance information. Use the
same steps to set the other maintenance
information.
SAA2480
4-8 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The unit can be converted between “US” and
“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” later in this section.)
SAA2482
SAA2619
Example
1. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance
schedule. To determine the recommended
maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
The Reminder will be automatically displayed
when the specified distance has been driven
and every time the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position. The reminder will not
appear while driving.
2. To display the reminder automatically when
the desired distance is reached, select the
“Reminder” key.
Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the
rest of the current drive.
3. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
To stop the reminder from appearing, perform
one of the following actions:
4. To return to the previous screen, push the
BACK button.
.
.
.
Select the “Reset Distance”.
Deactivate the “Reminder”.
Increase the “Interval” distance to be more
than the current distance being tracked.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2483
SAA2484
SAA2485
Example
Others information
HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON
Audio settings
The Others information display will appear when
pushing the INFO button and selecting the
“Others” key.
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Audio” key.
The display as illustrated will appear when the
SETTING button is pushed.
For navigation settings, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
GPS Position:
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:
For the details of this item, see the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound
balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance”
or “Fade” key and adjust it with the multi-
function controller.
Voice Recognition:
For the details of this item, see “NISSAN VOICE
RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-
tion system)” later in this section.
These items can also be adjusted by pushing
and turning the AUDIO knob.
4-10 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth® settings (for models with
navigation system)
For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see
“BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYS-
TEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section.
Speed Sensitive Vol.:
The audio system’s volume is increased with the
vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive Vol.”
and adjust the effect level with the multi-function
controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function
is turned off when the level is set to “OFF”.
Increasing the value will cause the volume to
increase faster with vehicle speed.
DivX® Registration Code:
The registration code for a device that is used to
download DivX® files will be displayed on the
screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is
connected to the audio system, this function will
not be activated.
SAA2554
Example
Volume and Beeps settings
Display Album Cover Art:
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Volume & Beeps” key.
When this item is turned to ON, the album cover
image is displayed when playing iPod® or MP3
music files through a CD, DVD or USB memory.
When the image is not properly embedded in
the file or device, the image will not be
displayed.
Audio Volume:
To increase or decrease the audio volume,
select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it with
the multi-function controller. You can also adjust
the audio volume by turning the VOLUME
control knob.
Phone settings
For details of the “Phone” settings, see “BLUE-
TOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
(models with navigation system)” later in this
section.
Guidance Volume:
To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or
softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
it with the multi-function controller.
When any mode button is pushed with the
screen off, the screen turns on for further
operation. The screen will turn off automatically
5 seconds after the operation is finished.
You can also adjust the guidance voice volume
by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice
guidance is being announced.
To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON
Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:
position, or push and hold the “
button.
OFF”
For the details of these items, see “BLUE-
TOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
(models with navigation system)” later in this
section.
.
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”
key.
Switch Beeps:
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a
beep sound when you use a button.
Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”
or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or
“Higher” using the multi-function controller.
SAA2486
Guidance Voice:
Display settings
For information on the “Background Color” key,
refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual.
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Display” key.
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear
voice guidance in the navigation operation or in
other operations.
For Roadster models:
NOTE:
Display Adjustment:
When the voice guidance is being an-
nounced during audio playback, turning
the volume knob does not adjust the music
level; it adjusts the guidance volume level.
If voice guidance is not being heard,
please check the Guidance Volume level.
Depending on the driver’s seat position, the
display could be hard to read. Adjust the
brightness and contrast of the display on the
setting screen.
To adjust the display settings, select the “Dis-
play Adjustment” key. The following settings are
available.
.
Display
Color Theme:
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button
and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other
Choose the theme color of the menu screen
from “Black”, “Blue” or “Red”.
method is to push and hold the “
button for more than 2 seconds.
OFF”
4-12 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Format (24h):
When this item is turned to ON, the 24-hour
clock is displayed. When this item is not turned
to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed.
Offset (hour)/(min):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
hour or per minute.
Daylight Saving Time:
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time
application.
Time Zone:
SAA2487
SAA2489
Choose the time zone from the following
Clock settings
Others settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Pacific
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Clock” key.
The Others settings display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Others” key.
Mountain
Central
The following items are available:
On-screen Clock:
Eastern
Atlantic
.
.
.
.
Comfort
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen.
Language & Units
Voice Recognition
Image Viewer
Newfoundland
Hawaii
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS
system.
Alaska
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
all settings to the default.
Light Off Delay:
Choose the duration of the automatic headlight
off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and
180 second periods.
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:
When this item is turned to ON, the wiper
interval is adjusted automatically according to
the vehicle speed.
Selective Door Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s
door is unlocked first after the door unlock
operation. When the door handle request switch
on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding
door is unlocked first. All the doors can be
unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-
formed again within 60 seconds.
SAA2488
Example
Comfort settings
The display as illustrated will appear when
pushing the SETTING button and selecting the
“Others” key, and then selecting the “Comfort”
key. This key does not appear on the display until
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.
When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors
will be unlocked after the door unlock operation
is performed once.
Auto Interior Illumination:
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, the interior
lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.
When this item is turned to ON, door lock/
unlock function by pushing the door handle
request switch will be activated.
Light Sensitivity:
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights
higher (right) or lower (left).
Return All Settings to Default:
Select this item and then select “YES” to return
4-14 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
Select Units:
Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”
(Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100 km)
for your favorite display appearance.
Voice Recognition settings
For details about the “Voice Recognition”
settings, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later
in this section.
SAA2490
SAA2491
Language & Units settings
Image Viewer
The Language & Units settings display will
appear when pushing the SETTING button,
selecting the “Others” key, and then selecting
the “Language & Units” key.
The image files in the USB memory will be
displayed. To display the Image Viewer, push the
SETTING button, select the “Other” key and
then select the “Image Viewer” key. The image of
the selected file is displayed on the right side of
the screen.
Select Language:
Select the “Select Language” key. Choose
When a number of folders are included in the
USB memory, select a folder from the list to
display the file list.
˜
“English”, “Franc¸ais” or “Espanol” for your
favorite display appearance.
If you select the “Franc¸ais” key, the French
language will be displayed, so please use the
French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French
Owner’s Manual, see “OWNER’S MANUAL/
SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in
Images will not be shown on the display while
the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. To view images, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking
brake.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
(Stop)
Select the “
(Next)
Select the “
(Previous)
Select the “ ” key to display the previous
Operating tips:
” key to stop the slideshow.
” key to display the next file.
.
Only files that meet the following conditions
will be displayed.
— Image type: JPEG
— File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg
— Maximum Resolution: 2048 6 1536
pixels
file.
— Maximum Size: 2-MB
Setting the Image Viewer:
— Colors: 32768 (15-bit)
The Image Viewer setting display will appear
when selecting the “Settings” key on the full
screen display. The following settings are
available for the full screen display.
— Maximum File Name lengths: 253-Bytes
— Maximum Folders: 500
SAA2492
Full Screen Display:
— Maximum Images per Folder: 1024
.
Slideshow Speed
The full screen display will appear when select-
ing the “Full Screen Display” key.
.
If an electronic device (such as a digital
camera) is directly connected to the vehicle
using a USB cable, no image will be
displayed on the screen.
Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. From the
following display, select the changing time
from 5, 10, 30, 60 seconds or “No Auto
Change”.
To operate the Image Viewer or to change the
settings, select the desired key using the multi-
function controller.
.
.
If the file name is too long, some file names
may not be entirely displayed.
.
Slideshow Order
.
(Start)
Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From the
following display, select “Random” or “Order
List”. For “Order List”, the image order is the
order of the files as stored on the USB
memory.
When the total number of characters in the
file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file name in a
directory exceeds 100 characters, all files
will show a shortened 8-character version.
The image will still be displayed when
selected.
Select the “
slideshow.
” key to start playing the
4-16 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTILATORS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
WARNING
.
.
The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
SAA2288
SAA2275
SIDE VENTILATORS
CENTER VENTILATORS
.
Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause the
interior air to become stale and the
windows to fog up.
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
of ventilators as illustrated.
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
of ventilators.
Start the engine and operate the heater and air
conditioner system.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2493
SAA2277
For the models with navigation system, push the
“STATUS” button to display the heater and air
conditioner status screen. (See “HOW TO USE
STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this section.)
1.
“
” fan speed control dial
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
2. Temperature control dial*
* The display of degrees:
(Type A)
“60-75-90” is used for 8F (US).
“18-25-32” is used for 8C (Canada).
In your vehicle, the air conditioner system
is designed to automatically activate the
cooling function when operating the air
3. Air flow control dial
4. “A/C” air conditioner button
flow control dial, the “
control dial or the “
” fan speed
” intake air
5. Intake air control button (“
” outside air and
“
” air recirculation)
control button. (The indicator light on the
“A/C” button will illuminate.) Push the
“A/C” button off when the cooling function
is not necessary.
6.
“
” rear window defroster button (See “REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.)
4-18 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, turn the “ ” fan
speed control dial to the maximum
position.
Heating (A/C OFF):
Automatic operation
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
1. Turn the “
” fan speed control dial and
This mode may be used all year round. The
system works automatically to control the inside
temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed
after the preferred temperature is set manually.
As soon as possible after the windshield
is clean, turn the air flow control dial to
the “AUTO” position to return to the auto
mode.
air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position.
(The air conditioner will turn on.)
2. Push the “A/C” button to turn off the air
conditioner. (The “A/C” button indicator light
will turn off.)
1. Turn the “
” fan speed control dial and
When the air flow control dial is turned
air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position.
The air conditioner will automatically turn on.
(The “A/C” button indicator light illuminates.)
to the “
” or “
” position, the air
conditioner will automatically be turned
on at outside temperatures above 238F
(−58C) to defog the windshield, and the
air recirculation mode will automatically
be turned off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
.
The temperature of the passenger com-
partment will be maintained automati-
cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
.
The temperature can be set within the
following range.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment to improve the defogging
performance.
.
.
Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise
the system may not work properly.
— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)
— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)
Manual operation
.
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
Fan speed control:
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Turn the “
” fan speed control dial clockwise
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to the
(+) or counterclockwise (−) to manually control
the fan speed.
desired position.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
Turn the dial to the “AUTO” position to return to
automatic control of the fan speed.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “
position.
”
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air recirculation:
Air flow control:
Push the “
” intake air control button to
Turning the air flow control dial selects the air
outlet to:
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the “ ” side will come on.
:
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors.
The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
mode “
:
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors and foot outlets.
”.
Outside air circulation:
:
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
Push the “
” intake air control button to
Air flows from defroster and foot out-
lets.
draw outside air into the passenger compart-
ment. The indicator light on the “
come on.
” side will
:
Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.
To turn the system off
Automatic intake air control:
Turn the “
“OFF” position.
” fan speed control dial to the
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control
the intake air, push the “
control button. To return to the automatic control
mode, push the “ ” intake air control
” intake air
button for approximately 2 seconds. The indi-
cator lights (both air recirculation and outside air
circulation sides) will flash twice, and then the
intake air will be controlled automatically.
4-20 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button/“
speed control dial
” fan
2.
3.
“
“
” front defroster button
” intake air control button
4. “AUTO” automatic air conditioner ON button/
Temperature control dial
5.
“
” rear window defroster button (See “REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.)
6. “MODE” manual air flow control button
7. “OFF” button
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
(Type B/Type C)
Automatic operation
SAA2278
Type B
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
This mode may be used all year round. The
system works automatically to control the inside
temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed
after the preferred temperature is set manually.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator
on the button will illuminate and AUTO will
be displayed.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
.
The temperature can be set within the
following range.
SAA2876
Type C
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)
.
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The
control of the fan speed.
— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)
Air recirculation:
.
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed will also be
controlled automatically.
Push the “
” intake air control button to
indicator light on the button will come on.)
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light “
” will come on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
The air recirculation mode cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
.
.
.
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control
dial and set it to the maximum position.
mode “
”.
Outside air circulation:
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to
the auto mode.
Push the “
” intake air control button to
Heating (A/C OFF):
change the air circulation from the intake air to
the outside air. The indicator light “
off.
The air conditioner does not activate in this
mode. When you need to heat only, use this
mode.
” will turn
When the “
” front defroster button is
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically
be turned on at outside temperatures above
238F (−58C) to defog the windshield, and
the air recirculate mode will automatically be
turned off.
Automatic air intake control:
1. Push the “AUTO” button on.
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control
the intake air, push the “
button. To return to the automatic control mode,
push the “ ” intake air control button for
approximately 2 seconds. The indicator lights
will flash twice, and then the intake air will be
controlled automatically.
2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator
will turn off.)
” intake air control
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment to improve the defogging
performance.
.
.
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
Manual operation
Air flow control:
Fan speed control:
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control
button selects the air outlet to:
Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the
system may not work properly.
Turn the “
manually control the fan speed.
” fan speed control dial to
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic
4-22 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING TIPS
:
:
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors.
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a
malfunction. After the coolant temperature
warms up, air will flow normally from the foot
outlets.
Air flows from center and side ventila-
tors and foot outlets.
:
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
Air flows from defroster and foot out-
lets.
A
B
The sensors
and
on the instrument
*
*
To turn the system off
Push the “OFF” button.
panel helps maintain a constant temperature. Do
not put anything on or around this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
SAA2324
The air conditioning system is equipped with an
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
filter in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
The filter should be replaced if air flow is
extremely decreased or when windows fog
up easily when operating heater or air
conditioning system.
Replacement interval: Every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 1 year
SAA2315
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SYSTEM
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
function in your NISSAN radio system.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Radio
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and push the radio band select button
to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition switch
should be pushed to the ACC position.
The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,
special charging equipment and lubricant are
required when servicing your NISSAN air con-
ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-
cants will cause severe damage to your air
conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND
RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information” section
for air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations.)
Reception conditions will constantly change
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other
vehicles can work against ideal reception.
Described below are some of the factors that
can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the
device in a different location may reduce or
eliminate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external
influences. Intermittent changes in reception
quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioning system.
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
WARNING
Radio reception:
The system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician
with the proper equipment.
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the
quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These
characteristics are completely normal in a given
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-
4-24 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a
malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the
satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any
metal or large building for the satellite radio to
receive all of the necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-
flected signals reach the receiver at the same
time. The signals may cancel each other,
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM radio reception:
The satellite radio performance may be affected
if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
radio signal.
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics. AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
SAA0306
FM radio reception:
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
antenna.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range than
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
interfere with FM station reception even if the
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light. For
example they will reflect off objects.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or
ventilate the player completely.
— CDs with a paper label
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or have
abnormal edges
.
.
This audio system can only play prerecorded
CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn
CDs.
.
.
The player may skip while driving on rough
roads.
The CD player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
perature before use.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-
TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.
— Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly
(the label side is facing up, etc.).
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped
and it is free of scratches.
.
.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,
covered with fingerprints, or that have pin
holes may not work properly.
PUSH EJECT:
This is an error due to the temperature inside
the player is too high. Remove the CD by
pushing the EJECT button, and after a short
time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played
when the temperature of the player returns
to normal.
.
The following CDs may not work properly:
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
SAA0480
Compact Disc (CD) player
UNPLAYABLE:
.
Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD and/
or CD changer/player.
.
Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction.
The file is unplayable in this audio system
(only MP3 or WMA CD).
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
.
Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed
could damage the CD and/or CD changer.
— CDs that are not round
4-26 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
may malfunction due to humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify
or ventilate the player completely.
DL)
.
Do not use the following CD/DVDs as they
may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunc-
tion.
.
.
The player may skip while driving on rough
roads.
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the
temperature before use.
— CD/DVDs that are not round
— CD/DVDs with a paper label
— CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or
have abnormal edges
.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-
TAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video” logo on the
disc or packaging.
— This audio system can only play prere-
corded CD/DVDs. It has no capabilities
to record or burn CD/DVDs.
.
.
Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
sunlight.
.
If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that
have pinholes may not work properly.
Disc Read Error:
— Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.).
.
The following CD/DVDs are not guaranteed
to play:
— Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
LHA0484
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player
(models with navigation system)
Please Eject Disc:
— This may be an error due to the tempera-
ture inside the player being too high.
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
.
Do not force a compact disc into the CD/
DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/
DVD player.
— Recordable DVDs (DVD+R, DVD+R
DL)
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
— Rewritable DVDs (DVD+RW, DVD+RW
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
persists, consult your local dealership.
.
.
Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
There are some USB devices which may not
be supported with this system.
Dolby digital is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
.
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
Unplayable File:
.
.
Dolby and the double D mark “
” are
— The file may be copy protected.
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
.
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector. This could damage
the connector.
— The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or
DivX® type.
DTS and DTS Digital Surround “
” are
registered trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-
midify or ventilate the USB player comple-
tely.
Region Invalid:
Parental level (parental control):
— The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.
Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL”
or “1 included” for your DVD entertain-
A
DVDs with the parental control setting can be
played with this system. Please use your own
judgement to set the parental control with the
system.
ment system. (The region code
displayed as a small symbol printed on
is
*
.
.
The USB player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
perature before use.
B
the top of the DVD
.) This vehicle-
*
Disc selection:
installed DVD player cannot play DVDs
with a region code other than “1” or
“ALL”.
The following disc formats can be played with
the DVD drive.
Do not leave USB memory in a place prone
to static electricity or where the air condi-
tioner blows directly. The data in the USB
memory may be damaged.
Copyright and trademark:
.
.
.
.
DVD-VIDEO
.
The technology protected by the U.S. patent
and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other right
holders is adopted for this system.
VIDEO-CD
.
.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB
memory stick.
CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)
DTS-CD
A USB device cannot be formatted with this
system. To format a USB device, use a
personal computer.
.
This copyright protected technology cannot
be used without a permit from Macrovision
Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
Corporation is not issued.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) (models with
navigation system)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod® players.
.
Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
4-28 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod®
nano (2nd Generation)
.
AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Do not connect a USB device if a connector
or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before con-
necting the USB device. If the connector is
exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-
tive residue may cause a short between the
connector pins.
.
.
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus - Adaptive Trans-
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by
Sony.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
AAC/ATRAC3)
Explanation of terms:
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. The compression
reduces certain parts of sound that seem
inaudible to most people.
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
If an iPod® automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
.
.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
.
An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
.
.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
Music playback order of compressed audio
files is as illustrated in the next figure.
SAA2494
Playback order:
.
The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
.
If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
4-30 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL, USB2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2,
Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems
UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
Version
MP3
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
Version
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported
versions*1
Bit rate
Version
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
MPEG-AAC
AAC
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz
Bit rate
Version
16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ATRAC
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Without navigation system:
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With navigation system: 100 characters
Without navigation system: 64 characters
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*3
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
4-32 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will
be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In
addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time before
the music starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright
when playing.
protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.
The songs do not play back in the
desired order.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Requirement for Supporting Video Play-
back:
Compressed Video Files (models with
navigation system)
Explanation of terms:
Media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
File Systems
CD,
CD-R,
.
DivX® - DivX® refers to the DivX® codec
owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy
compression of video based on MPEG-4.
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge
(UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
CD-RW,
DVD,
DVD+R,
DVD+RW,
DVD+RW DL
- ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
- Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows
Vista-based computer) are not supported.
.
AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is a standard file format originated by
Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file
can be saved into the “.avi” file format for
playback on this system if it meets the
requirements stated in the table in this
section. However, not all the “.avi” files are
playable on this system since different
encodings can be used than the DivX®
codec.
- VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB Memory
.divx, .avi
FAT16, FAT32
File Types
Video Codecs
Audio Codecs
Video Codec
Audio Codec
Maximum Average
Maximum Peak
Minimum
DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
.asf
ISO-MPEG4
G.726
Bit Rates
.divx, .avi
.divx, .avi
.asf
4Mbps
.
.
ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only “.asf” files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
8Mbps
Resolution
32 6 32
720 6 480
32 6 32
720 6 576
Maximum
Minimum
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Maximum
4-34 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth® Audio player (models with
navigation system)
quicker than usual.
.
.
A mark indicating jumping sounds is dis-
played if jumping sounds are recorded.
.
.
This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
.
Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
No sounds may be recorded if jumping
sounds occurs or the disc is in poor
condition.
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Clarion
Co., Ltd.
.
It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible Blue-
tooth® audio device and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth® module before using the Blue-
tooth® audio player.
.
.
Tracks that include Serial Copy Manage-
ment System (SCMS) are not recorded.
If a compact disc is scratched or dirty, it may
not be recorded, jumping sounds may occur
or it may take a long time to record.
Music Box hard drive
.
.
Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio player will vary depending on the
device. Make sure it is understood how to
operate an audio device before using it with
this system.
Recording:
Automatic title download:
.
Note that data that is lost and not stored to
the hard disk drive due to system damage,
improper operation or malfunction is not
under warranty.
.
The title information that is automatically
downloaded may differ from the actual title.
The Bluetooth® audio player may be stopped
under the following conditions:
.
When newly released compact discs are
recorded, their title information may not be
downloaded.
.
.
.
.
Vehicle owners are not permitted to record
music without permission of the owner of
the copyright except for personal use.
— Receiving a hands-free call.
.
The title information in the hard disk can be
updated. (See “Playing recorded songs”
later in this section.)
— Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
Check if the music is appropriately recorded
to the hard disk drive after recording when
the compact disc cannot be rerecorded.
.
.
Do not place a Bluetooth® audio device in an
area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.
Some music cannot be recorded depending
on the disc condition due to high-speed
recording.
Jumping sounds may be recorded when a
compact disc is recorded while driving on
rough roads and excessive vibration occurs.
While an audio device is connected through
a Bluetooth® wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the device may discharge
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. RPT (repeat) button
14. TUNE/FF·REW button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) PLAYER
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then push the PWR button while
the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD
or AUX) which was playing immediately before
the system was turned off. While the system is
on, pushing the PWR button turns the system
off.
SAA2742
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
1. FM·AM radio band select button
2. CD EJECT button
7. MENU button
8. SEEK/APS (automatic program search) FF (fast
forward)·APS REW (rewind) button
MENU button:
3. CD button
9. RDM (random) button
4. Station and preset select buttons
5. Audio display
Push the MENU button to change the selecting
mode as follows.
10. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob
11. SCAN tuning button
6. AUX (auxiliary) button
12. AUX IN jack
4-36 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last station played will also come on when
the PWR button is pushed to ON.
station.
to
Station memory operations:
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is pushed, the audio source
will automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will come on.
Push the TUNE
or
or SEEK
or
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6
each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band.
button to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and
Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts the
sound level between the front and rear speakers
and Balance adjusts the sound between the
right and left speakers.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the radio band select button.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, push the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears (normal
mode). Otherwise, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear after approximately 10
seconds.
TUNE (Tuning):
3. Select the desired station and push and
hold the desired station preset buttons 1 to
6 until a beep sound is heard. (The radio
mutes when the select button is pushed.)
Push the TUNE button
tuning.
or
for manual
SEEK tuning:
For information about adjusting the clock dis-
play, see “TRIPLE METER” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
Push the SEEK button
low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
or
to tune from
FM-AM radio operation
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
Radio (FM/AM) band select:
SCAN tuning:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stops at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 seconds period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the
label side facing up. The CD will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc will appear on the display.
being played, the CD will play while fast
forwarding or rewinding.
RPT button:
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Track Repeat
RDM button:
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
When the button is released, the CD will return
to normal play speed.
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Disc Random
The display shows the following symbols:
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the CD.
APS (Automatic Program Search)
FF, APS REW:
(No mark): 1 Disc Repeat
1: 1 Track Repeat
MP3 or WMA CDs are not supported with this
CD player. If an MP3 or WMA CD is inserted
into the slot, the counter on the audio display
automatically advances without sound. However
this is a specification of the CD mechanism and
not a malfunction.
When the
(APS FF) of the SEEK button is
pushed while the CD is being played, the next
track or the current track on the CD will start to
play from its beginning. Push several times to
skip through tracks. The CD will advance the
number of times the button is pushed. (When
the last track on the CD is skipped through, the
first track will be played.)
RDM: 1 Disc Random
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will come out and the
system will turn off.
When the
(APS REW) button is pushed,
CD PLAY:
the track being played returns to its beginning.
Push several times to skip back through tracks.
The CD will go back the number of times the
button is pushed.
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
REPEAT (RPT)/RANDOM
(RDM) play:
SCAN tuning:
When the RPT or RDM button is pushed while a
CD is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the beginning of all the
tracks of the CDs will be played for 10 seconds
in sequence.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind) of
the TUNE button is pushed while the CD is
4-38 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
10 seconds, SCAN tuning continues to move to
the next CD track.
AUX (Auxiliary) input
AUX IN jack:
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
Push the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is
invalid).
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. SCAN tuning button
13. ON·OFF button/ VOL (volume) control knob
14. DISC button
15. RPT (repeat) button
16. AUX (auxiliary) button
17. RDM (random) button
18. AUX IN jack
19. TUNE the CH (channel) or FOLDER/FF·REW
button
SAA2280
1. CD EJECT button
7. SEEK the TRACK, CAT (category) or FILE/APS
(automatic program search) FF (fast forward)·APS
REW (rewind) button
2. DISP (display) button
3. Radio station preset/CD select buttons
4. Audio display
8. MUTE button
9. FM·AM band select button
10. AUDIO button
5. SCRL (scroll) button
6. LOAD button
11. SAT (satellite) band select button
4-40 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) CHANGER (models without
navigation system)
system is on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns
the system off.
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
radio (FM/AM) band select:
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
MUTE button:
Push the
Push the
button to mute the audio sound.
button again to release the mute.
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
radio (SAT) band select:
Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
ance:
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing to the XM Satellite
Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an
available channel list will be automatically
updated in the radio. For XM, push the ignition
switch from LOCK to ACC to update the
channel list.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
the Audio button. When the display shows the
setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade), push the SEEK or TUNE
button to set the desired setting.
XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played.
These items can also be adjusted by pushing
the AUDIO button.
Audio main operation
The last channel played will also come on when
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
Head unit:
.
Speed Sensitive Vol.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Sound volume is increased according to the
vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from
“HIGH”, “MID”, “LOW” or “OFF”.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.
.
Beep tuning
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF button
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD or AUX) which was playing immediately
before the system was turned off. While the
When this item is turned to ON, you will hear
a beep sound when you use a button.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
monaural reception.
SAT tuner is connected.)
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.
.
.
OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
TUNE (Tuning):
For AM and FM radio
3. Push and hold the desired radio station
CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection
error)
1
6
preset button
to
until a beep sound
*
*
.
.
is heard. (The radio mutes when the select
button is pushed.)
Push the TUNE button
manual tuning.
or
for
.
.
LOADING (When the initial setting is
performed)
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
For XM Satellite Radio
Push the TUNE button
UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-
scription is not active)
or
to seek
channels from all of the categories when any
CAT is not selected.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
SCAN tuning:
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stop at each broad-
casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing
the button again during this 5 seconds period
will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station/channel.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
(CAT):
.
.
For AM and FM radio
RADIO DISPLAY change:
Push the SEEK button
or
to tune
When the DISP button is pushed while the radio
is being played, the audio display will change as
follows:
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station/channel.
For XM Satellite Radio
1
6
to
Station memory operations:
*
*
Push the SEEK button
to the first channel of the next or previous
category.
or
to tune
Eighteen stations/channels can be set for the
SAT band (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3),
twelve can be set for the FM band (6 each for
FM1 and FM2), and 6 can be set for the AM
band.
Compact Disc (CD) changer operation
During satellite radio reception, the following
notices will be displayed under certain condi-
tions.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, push the LOAD button and insert the
CD into the slot with the label side facing up.
The CD will be guided automatically into the slot
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
.
NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the
4-42 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and start playing.
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind):
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.
When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is
loaded and a medium is played using the
auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and
forth between CD and medium.
CD:
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
button is pushed while the CD is being played,
the CD will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
CD will return to normal play speed.
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the CD.
CD DISPLAY information:
When the DISP button is pushed while the CD
is being played, the audio display will change as
follows:
CD with MP3 or WMA:
CD LOAD:
When the
or
button is pushed for less
CD:
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the folders in the CD will change.
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading position by pushing the CD insert
When the
or
button is pushed for
1
*
6
*
select button
to
, then insert the CD.
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the CD will play while forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the CD
will return to the normal play speed.
To insert
6
CDs to the CD changer in
CD with MP3 or WMA:
succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the
display.
APS (Automatic Program
Search) FF, APS REW:
PLAY:
When the
(APS FF) button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the program next to the
present one will start to play from its beginning.
Push several times to skip through programs.
The CD will advance the number of times the
button is pushed. (When the last program on the
CD is skipped through, the first program will be
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with
the system off and the CD loaded, the system
will turn on and the CD will start to play.
When the DISC button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
played.) When the
(APS REW) button is
To eject the discs selected by the CD select
button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5
seconds.
RANDOM (RDM) play:
pushed, the program being played returns to its
beginning. Push several times to skip back
through programs. The CD will go back the
number of times the button is pushed.
When the RDM button is pushed while the CD
is played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for
more than 1.5 seconds.
CD PLAY selection:
(CD)
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will come out and the
system will turn off.
To change to another CD already loaded into the
player, push the CD play select buttons
6
.
*
1
*
to
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
REPEAT (RPT) play:
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is
played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
AUX (Auxiliary) input
AUX IN jack:
(CD)
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
Scroll (SCRL) button:
When the title is displayed but it is a long one,
the whole title is not shown in the display. In this
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
case, push the
button to scroll the title.
When the title is scrolled to the end of it, the
display will stop moving and return to the first
condition.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
Push the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is
invalid).
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
4-44 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (models with navi-
gation system)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.
After receiving the activation signal, an available
channel list will be automatically updated in the
radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from
LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
SAA2495
1. CD EJECT button
7. FM·AM band select button
2. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob
3. Radio station preset select buttons
4. DISC·AUX (auxiliary) button
8. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button
9. SAT (satellite) button
10. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for
SEEK/TRACK
5. Radio TUNE (tuning) folder selector/AUDIO con-
trol knob
11. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
6. Radio SCAN tuning button
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Switching the display:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF button
while the system is off to turn on the last audio
source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF
button turns the system off.
Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the
displays as follows:
iPod®/USB ? CD/DVD ? Music Box ?
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
Bluetooth® Audio ? AUX ? iPod®/USB
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
TUNE (Tuning):
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
radio (FM/AM) band select:
.
For AM and FM radio
Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
ance:
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.
For XM Satellite Radio
.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
the Audio control knob. When the display shows
the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control
knob to set the desired setting. For the other
setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SETTING
BUTTON” earlier in this section.
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels
from all of the categories when any category
is not selected.
radio (SAT) band select:
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
(CAT):
XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
This vehicle has some sound effect functions as
follows:
.
.
For AM and FM radio
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played.
Push the SEEK button
or
to tune
.
Speed Sensitive Vol.
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION
AND SETTINGS (models with navigation sys-
tem)” earlier in this section.
The last channel played will also come on when
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
For XM Satellite Radio
Push the SEEK button
to the first channel of the next or previous
category.
or
to tune
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
4-46 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During satellite radio reception, the following
notices will be displayed under certain condi-
tions.
new preset.
1
6
to
Station memory operations:
*
*
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band
(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6
each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations
can be set for the AM band.
Menu (XM Satellite Radio):
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected
while the XM Satellite Radio is being played, the
menu list will be displayed.
.
NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the
SAT tuner is connected.)
.
.
OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
The following items are available.
CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection
error)
.
Preset List
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
the SEEK/TRACK, SCAN button or the
radio TUNE knob.
Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of the 6
preset stations listed is touched and held,
the current station will be stored as the new
preset.
.
.
LOADING (When the initial setting is
performed)
3. Push and hold the desired station preset
UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-
scription is not active)
1
*
6
*
button
to
until the radio mutes.
.
.
Customize Channel List
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
Selects specific channels to skip while using
the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or Menu-
Categories feature.
SCAN tuning:
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stop at each broad-
casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing
the button again during this 5 seconds period
will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station/channel.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
Favorite Artists & Songs
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations/channels.
Stores the current artist or song that is being
played. Touch the “Alert” key to be reminded
when the stored artist or song is playing on a
station while listening to XM.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station/channel.
List (AM and FM radio):
.
Categories
When the “List” key on the display is selected
while the FM or AM radio is being played, the
preset station list will be displayed.
Selecting a category will go to the first
channel in that category as defined by XM
Radio.
If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and
held, the current station will be stored as the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Direct Tune
to play.
.
Title Text Priority (for CD)
Inputs the channel number by using a
keypad.
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base) to acquire track information from
the Gracenote Database, or set the priority
to CD-TEXT to acquire the information from
CDs.
Menu:
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected
while the CD is being played, the menu screen
will be displayed. The following menu options
are available.
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
be guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
.
.
Automatic Recording (for CD)
.
Folder List (for CD with compressed audio
files)
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box hard drive automatically starts recording
when a CD is inserted.
Displays the folder list.
Track List
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.
.
.
Recording Quality (for CD)
Displays the track list.
Play Mode
The larger number (132) will increase the
recorded sound quality while taking up more
space on the Music Box leaving less room
for more songs.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
Select a play mode from the following items.
— Normal
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the CD.
For the details of Music Box, see “MUSIC BOX
HARD-DISK DRIVE (models with navigation
system)” later in this section.
— 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with compressed
audio files)
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
— 1 Track Repeat
— 1 Disc Random
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
PLAY:
When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is
pushed with the system off and the CD loaded,
the system will turn on and the CD will start to
play.
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
— 1 Folder Random (for CD with com-
pressed audio files)
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the CD is being played, the CD will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the CD will return to normal
play speed.
.
Record to Music Box (for CD)
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
Select to choose specific songs on the CD
to record to the Music Box.
4-48 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
it.
CAUTION
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track on the CD will be played.
DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC)
PLAYER OPERATION (models with na-
vigation system)
.
Only operate the DVD while the
vehicle engine is running. Operating
the DVD for extended periods of
time with the engine OFF can dis-
charge the vehicle battery.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system.
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is
played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
.
.
Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled
liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to
reduce driver distraction. Audio is available
when a movie is played. To view movies in the
front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,
move the selector lever to the P (Park) position
and apply the parking brake.
(CD)
While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee
complete functionality of all VI-
DEO-CD formats.
(CD with compressed audio files)
WARNING
Display settings
.
.
The driver must not attempt to
operate the DVD system or wear
the headphones while the vehicle is
in motion so that full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
To adjust the front display mode, push the
SETTING button while the DVD is being played,
select the “Others” key and then select the
“Display” key.
CD EJECT:
To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,
color and contrast, select the “Display Adjust-
ment” key and then select each key.
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
Do not attempt to modify the system
to display a movie on the front
screen while the vehicle is being
driven. Doing so may distract the
driver and may cause a collision and
serious personal injury or death.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will be ejected.
Then you can adjust each item using the multi-
function controller. After changes have been
made push the BACK button to save the setting.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX
button again.
times this key is selected.
/
Commercial Skip:
DVD operation keys:
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.
When the DVD is playing without the operation
screen being shown, you may use the touch
screen to select items from the displayed video.
You may also use the multifunction controller to
select an item from the displayed video. When
the operation screen is being shown, use the
multifunction controller or touch screen to select
an item from the displayed menus.
Select the “
” or “
” key to skip forward
or backwards by the set amount as defined in
the DVD Settings menu.
/
Next/Previous Image:
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the
” or “ ” key to advance or rewind the
“
still image. The still image will advance or rewind
the number of times this key is selected.
PAUSE:
SAA2497
Select the “
resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” key.
” key to pause the DVD. To
Top Menu:
Playing a DVD
When the “Top Menu” key is selected in the
screen while a DVD is being played, the top
menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For
details, see the instructions on the disc.
DISC·AUX button:
PLAY:
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the DVD
drive while watching the images.
Select the “
for example, after pausing the DVD.
” key to start playing the DVD,
Push the DISC·AUX button on the instrument
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.
STOP:
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed
automatically.
Select the “
” key to stop playing the DVD.
Next/Previous Chapter:
” or “ ” key to skip the
/
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC·AUX button located on the instrument
panel is pushed while a DVD is being played,
and it will turn off automatically after a period of
Select the “
chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. The
chapters will advance/go back the number of
4-50 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switched to another one. Select the “Angle” key.
The angle will change each time the “+” side or
“−” side is selected.
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO):
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions on the
disc.
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will
be shown on the bottom of the screen if the
scene can be seen from a different angle.
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed each time the “+” side or “−” side is
selected.
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
DVD menus are automatically configured and
the contents will be played directly when the
“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some
discs may not be played directly even if this item
is turned on.
Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD):
A scene in the specified group will be displayed
each time the “+” side or “−” side is selected.
SAA2498
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD-
DA, DVD-VR):
Example
DVD settings
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings.
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number to be
searched and select the “OK” key. The specified
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.
Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the setting
time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the
“+” side or “−” side.
Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):
DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.
: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.
Enter: Enter the selected menu.
Select No. (VIDEO-CD):
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automati-
cally adjusts the soundtrack volume level to
maintain a more even sound to the speakers.
Select the “Select No.” key to open the number
entry screen. Input the number to be searched
and select the “OK” key. The specified scene
will be played.
Move: Change the display location by moving
the operation key.
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number corre-
sponding to the preferred language and select
the “OK” key. The DVD top menu language will
Angle (DVD-VIDEO):
Back: Return to the previous screen.
Hide: Hide the operation key.
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle can be
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be changed to the one specified.
Display:
To adjust the image quality of the screen, select
the preferred adjustment items.
Audio:
Select the preferred language for audio.
Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):
Select the preferred language for subtitles.
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,
DVD-VR):
SAA2499
SAA2500
Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” modes.
File selection
USB MEMORY OPERATION (models
with navigation system)
When there are both audio and movie files in the
USB memory, the mode select screen is
displayed. Select the preferred contents to play.
Title List (DVD-VR):
Audio main operation
Select the preferred title from the list.
Play Mode:
Open the console lid and connect a USB
memory as illustrated. Then, push the DISC·AUX
button repeatedly to switch to the USB memory
mode.
When there is only one type of file, the audio or
movie operation screen is displayed and starts
to play.
Select the preferred play mode.
PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR):
Select the “PG” or “PL” mode.
If a video file restricts the number of playbacks, a
pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to
play. Answer yes or no as requested by the
display.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL
control knob will start the USB memory.
4-52 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.
Next/Previous File and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
All Random ? 1 Folder Random ? Normal
When the
(Rewind) or
(Fast Forward)
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while a USB memory is being played, the USB
memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the USB memory
will return to normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
the current track on the USB memory will be
played.
SAA2501
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the USB memory is being
played.
Audio file operation
PLAY:
Folder selection:
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on.
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the folder selector or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the multi-function
controller.
If another audio source is playing and a USB
memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
memory is played, the play pattern can be
change as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
playback mode.
.
Play Mode
Select the preferred play mode.
SAA2502
SAA2503
Movie file operation
Menu:
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the USB
memory while watching the images.
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following options that
are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer
to the following information for each item.
PLAY:
.
Movie Playback
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on.
Switch to the movie playback mode. This
item is displayed only when a USB memory
contains movie files.
If another audio source is playing and a USB
memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
.
Folder List/Track List
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen, and enables switching to the movie
4-54 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the number of times the “
” key is selected.
Operation keys:
To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the operation screen using the
multi-function controller.
List:
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
screen to display the file list.
Pause
Select the “
” key to pause the movie file. To
resume playing the movie file, select the “
key.
”
Play
Select the “
for example, after pausing a movie file.
” key to start playing a movie file,
SAA2504
Example
Settings:
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings.
STOP
Select the “
” key to stop playing a movie file.
” key to skip the chapter(s) of
.
Audio File Playback
Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains the audio files.
Skip (Next chapter)
Select the “
the disc forward. The chapters will advance the
number of times the ENTER button is pushed.
.
Play Mode
Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Repeat” play
mode.
Skip (Previous chapter)
Select the “
” key to skip the chapter(s) of
the disc backward. The chapters will go back
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
(models with navigation system)
.
10 Key Search
Regulatory information
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen.
FCC Regulatory information:
Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®
Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible
Bluetooth® device with streaming audio (A2DP
profile), you can set up the wireless connection
between your Bluetooth® device and the in-
vehicle audio system. This connection allows
you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth®
device using your vehicle speakers. It also may
allow basic control of the device for playing and
skipping audio files using the AVRCP Blue-
tooth® profile. All Bluetooth® Devices do not
have the same level of controls for AVRCP.
Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth®
Device for more details.
—
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
Input the number to be searched and select
the “OK” key.
The specified folder/file will be played.
.
.
Display
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
To adjust the image quality of the screen,
select the preferred adjustment items.
1) This device may not cause interference
and
DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device
Once your Bluetooth® device is connected to
the in-vehicle audio system, it will automatically
reconnect whenever the device is present in the
vehicle and you select Bluetooth® Audio from
your audio system. You do not need to manually
reconnect for each usage.
.
.
.
Audio
IC Regulatory information:
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Select the preferred language for audio.
Subtitle
1) This device may not cause interference,
and
Select the preferred language for subtitle.
Display Mode
2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or
“Full” mode.
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
4-56 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.
SAA2505
SAA2506
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
Connecting procedure
1. Push the SETTING button and select the
“Bluetooth” key.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2507
SAA2508
SAA2509
3. A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select “No”.
4. Choose a PIN code to use with the
compatible Bluetooth audio device using
the number input screen. The PIN code will
need to be entered into the Bluetooth® audio
device after step 5. Select the “OK” key.
5. The standby message screen will appear.
Operate the compatible Bluetooth® audio
device. For the connecting procedure of the
audio device, see the Bluetooth® audio
instructions.
Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect the
hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth®
device.
When the connecting is completed, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth® setup
display.
4-58 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISC·AUX button:
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the Bluetooth® audio device
connected, the system will turn on. If another
audio source is playing and the Bluetooth® audio
device is connected, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the display changes to the
Bluetooth® audio mode.
To change the play mode, push the
repeatedly and the mode changes as follows.
button
Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle Group
? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All Tracks ?
Repeat Group ? Normal
Operation keys:
To operate a Bluetooth® audio device, select a
key displayed on the operation screen using the
multi-function controller.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio
file is being played, the Bluetooth® audio device
will play while forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the Bluetooth® audio
device will return to normal play speed.
SAA2510
Play
Audio main operation
Select the “
pausing. Select this key again to pause the
audio play.
” key to start playing when
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth® audio
mode. If the system has been turned off while
the Bluetooth® audio device was playing, push-
ing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the
Bluetooth® audio device.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio file is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
the current track on the Bluetooth® audio device
will be played. The multi-function controller can
also be used to select tracks when the Blue-
tooth® audio play mode screen is shown on the
display. (“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on
the header of the screen.)
Pause
Select the “
audio device. Select this key again to resume
playing.
” key to pause the Bluetooth®
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward,
rewind, randomize and repeat music may be
different between devices. Some or all of these
functions may not be supported on each device.
Play Mode:
The play mode setting display will appear when
the “Menu” key is selected.
Choose the preferred play mode from the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
following items.
Connected Devices:
.
Shuffle
Registered devices are shown on the list. Select
a Bluetooth® device from the list, the following
options will be available.
Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All Tracks”
and “Shuffle Group”.
.
.
.
Select
.
Repeat
Select “Select” to connect the selected
device to the vehicle. If there is a different
device currently connected, the selected
device will replace the current device.
Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1
Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat
Group”.
Edit
Rename the selected Bluetooth® device
using the keypad displayed on the screen.
(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN”
earlier in this section.)
SAA2511
Bluetooth® settings
To set up the Bluetooth® device system to the
preferred settings, push the SETTING button
and select the “Bluetooth” key.
Delete
Delete the selected Bluetooth® device.
Bluetooth:
Edit Bluetooth Info:
If this setting is turned off, the connection
between the Bluetooth® devices and the in-
vehicle Bluetooth® module will be canceled.
Change the name broadcasted by this system
over Bluetooth®. Change the PIN code that is
entered when connecting a hands free device to
this system.
Connect Bluetooth:
Replace Connected Phone:
Connects to the Bluetooth® device. See “Con-
necting procedure” earlier in this section. Up to
5 devices can be registered.
Replace the Bluetooth® connection with a
connected Bluetooth® cellular phone. For details
about Hands-Free Phone System, see “BLUE-
TOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
4-60 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(models with navigation system)” later in this
section.
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are available:
.
.
.
Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.3 or later)
iPod Classic® (version 1.1.1 or later)
First generation iPod touch® (version 2.0.0
or later)
.
.
.
.
.
Second generation iPod touch® (version
1.2.3 or later)
First generation iPod nano® (version 1.3.1 or
later)
SAA2512
Second generation iPod nano® (version
1.1.3 or later)
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (models
with navigation system)
Connecting iPod®
Third generation iPod nano® (version 1.1 or
later)
Open the console lid and connect the iPod®
cable to the USB connector. If compatible, the
battery of the iPod® is charged while the
connection to the vehicle.
Fourth generation iPod nano® (version 1.0.2
or later)
Make sure that the iPod® version is updated.
Depending on the version of the iPod®, the
display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN or
Accessory Attached screen when the connec-
tion is completed. When the iPod® is connected
to the vehicle, the iPod® music library can only
be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
Audio main operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
start the iPod®.
DISC·AUX button:
.
.
.
Composers
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing
and the iPod® is connected, push the DISC·AUX
button repeatedly until the center display
changes to the iPod® mode.
The following touch-panel buttons shown on the
screen are also available:
.
.
: returns to the previous screen.
: plays/pauses the music selected.
Interface:
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
interface. Use the multi-function controller and
the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®
with your favorite settings.
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding
or rewinding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
The following items can be chosen from the
menu list screen. For further information about
each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current track
on the iPod® will be played.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Now Playing
Playlists
Artists
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
Albums
Songs
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
Podcasts
Genres
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
4-62 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE (mod-
els with navigation system)
.
Individual tracks can be deleted from
the hard-disk drive after the CD is
recorded.
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system
can store songs from CDs being played. The
system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage
capacity and can record up to 200 hours
(approximately 2,900 songs).
The following CDs can be recorded in the
“Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.
.
.
CDs that contain uncompressed audio files
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs
SAA2513
.
.
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) spe-
cification in CD-Extras
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For
the details of playing CDs, see “Compact
Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in this
section.
First session of multisession disc
Extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)] could
affect the performance of the hard-disk.
2. Select the “Start REC” key.
NOTE:
NOTE:
If the hard-disk needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
.
The system starts playing and record-
ing the 1st track on the CD when the
“Start REC” key is selected.
.
The recording process can be stopped
at any time. All tracks that were played
before the CD was stopped are stored.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned
to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.
(See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)
Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, select the “Stop REC”
key button by touching the screen or using the
multi-function controller.
If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned
off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position, the recording also stops.
SAA2514
SAA2515
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the
CD, the title is automatically displayed on the
screen. For title acquisition from the hard-disk
drive, music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Playing recorded songs
Select the “Music Box” audio system by using
one of the following methods.
.
Push the audio source switch on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the center
display changes to the Music Box mode.
(See “STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED
CONTROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this
section.)
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the
behind the track number.
mark is displayed
The “Music Box” hard disk drive cannot perform
recording under the following conditions.
.
.
Push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
.
.
There is not enough space in the hard-disk
Give voice commands. (See “NISSAN
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models
The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
4-64 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
with navigation system)” later in this sec-
tion.)
Play mode selection:
The TUNE/FOLDER knob will skip from album to
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,
the knob will change the track instead of the
album. The upper right corner of the main screen
will indicate if the TUNE knob is changing by
track or album.
Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:
a. another mode (radio, CD, DVD, USB
memory, iPod or AUX) is selected.
b. the audio system is turned off.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
c. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK
position.
When the RPT·RDM button is pushed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
SAA2516
(Normal) ? 1 Album Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat
? 1 Album Random ? All Random ? (Normal)
Example
There are some options available by selecting
the “Menu” key on the screen during playback.
Select one of the following options that are
displayed on the screen if necessary.
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while a track is being played, the track will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the track will return to the
normal play speed.
Tag Track:
Select “Tag Track” key on the screen when a
track is being played. A menu will show the 5
available playlists. Select one of the playlists to
add the current song to that playlist. If a playlist
is not selectable (text is grayed out), it means
the song already exists in that playlist.
Now Playing:
Displays a track list to choose a preferred track
for playback.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track will be played.
Music Library:
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following options that
are displayed on the screen if necessary.
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when a track is being played.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Artists
list to add to the Playlist.
.
.
.
.
1 Artist Random
1 Album Random
1 All Track Random
1 All Random
Play tracks by an artist whose music is
currently being played. The artists are sorted
in alphabetical order.
.
Add Songs by Artist
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks
by the artist. Select tracks from the list to
add to the Playlist.
.
.
.
Albums
Edit Music Information:
Play tracks in each album. The albums are
sorted in alphabetical order.
.
.
Edit Songs Order
Displays the following information about the
Music Box hard drive to edit if necessary.
All Songs
Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by select-
ing a track and specifying the order.
.
Edit Information of Current Song
Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The
tracks are sorted in alphabetical order.
Edit Name
Edit the “Track”, “Artist” and “Genre” in-
formation of the current track using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier
in this section.)
Genres
Edit the name of the Playlist using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION CON-
TROLLER” earlier in this section.)
Play tracks by a selected genre.
My Playlists:
Edit the “Mode” information by selecting
from the list.
.
Delete Songs
Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist if
necessary.
Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting from
the displayed song list.
.
.
Edit Information by Album
Select the “Edit” key.
Edit the displayed name and of a selected
album and the track information in the album.
Play Mode:
The following items are available
Choose the preferred play mode from the
following items.
.
Add Current Songs
Update Gracenote from USB Device
Add a current track to the Playlist.
Add Songs by Album
Update the in-vehicle Gracenote Database
using a USB memory. Search the title from a
information acquired on the Internet. Visit
www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details.
.
.
.
.
Normal
.
1 Album Repeat
1 Track Repeat
1 Playlist Random
Displays a list of albums in alphabetical
order. Selecting an album displays all of the
tracks in the album. Select tracks from the
4-66 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Transfer Missing Titles to USB
Delete Songs from Music Box:
Transfer the information of an album re-
corded without titles to a USB memory. Visit
www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details.
Deletes the current song, selected songs or
albums by choosing from the list, or all songs/
albums in the Music Box.
Update Gracenote from HDD
Recording Quality:
Search the title using the database in the
hard disk.
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps.
CDDB Version:
The version of the built-in Gracenote Database
is displayed.
Gracenote
SAA2517
NOTE:
Music Box settings
.
The information contained in the
Gracenote Database is not fully guar-
anteed.
To set the Music box hard drive to your preferred
settings, select the “Menu” key during playback,
and the “Music Box Settings” key with the
multi-function controller, and then push the
ENTER button.
.
The service of the Gracenote Database
on the Internet may be stopped without
prior notice for maintenance.
Music Box Used/Free Space:
Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track”
and “Remaining Time” is displayed.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box
hard drive automatically starts recording when a
CD is inserted.
Gracenote® MusicID® Terms of Use
This application or device contains software
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-
cation to perform disc and/or file identification
and obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information (“Grace-
note Data”) from online servers or embedded
databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended
End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Grace-
note Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT
TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-
NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
for any information that you provide.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI-
CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN-
GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-
NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly
in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identi-
fier is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Grace-
note service.
Copyright:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin-
terrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its services at
any time.
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more
information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
C
Inc., copyright * 2000-2009 Gracenote.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license termi-
nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-
ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all
ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you
C
Gracenote Software, copyright * 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
P a t e n t s: # 5, 98 7, 52 5; #6 , 0 61 , 6 80;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-
4-68 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
are trademarks of Gracenote.
.
Red - right channel audio input
Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the
power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the
jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
until the display switches to the AUX mode. The
output from the device will be played through
the monitor and audio system.
SAA2282
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS (models with
navigation system)
The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center
console. NTSC compatible devices such as
video games, camcorders and portable video
players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.
Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
tion purposes.
.
.
Yellow - video input
White - left channel audio input
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume Settings:
Choose the volume setting from the following
items.
.
.
.
Low
Medium
High
Display:
Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the
preferred adjustment items.
SAA2496
SAA0451
AUX Menu
CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND
CLEANING
When the “Menu” key on the display is selected
while in the AUX mode, the menu screen will be
displayed.
CD/DVD
.
Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend the
disc.
Display Mode:
Choose the display mode from the following
items.
.
.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
.
.
.
Normal
Wide
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
Cinema
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
4-70 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Audio source switch
alcohol intended for industrial use.
2. Menu control switch (models with navigation
system) or audio tuning switch (models without
navigation system)
.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
3. Back switch
4. Volume control switch
USB memory
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-
TROLS FOR AUDIO
.
.
.
.
.
Never touch the terminal portion of the USB
memory.
Menu control switch (models with navi-
gation system) or audio tuning switch
(models without navigation system)
While the display is showing a MAP (navigation
systems only), STATUS or Audio screen, tilt the
switch upward or downward to select a station,
track, CD or folder. For most audio sources,
tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5
seconds provides a different function than tilting
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.
Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory.
Do not store the USB memory in highly
humid locations.
SAA2555
With navigation system
Do not expose the USB memory to direct
sunlight.
Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for
the details.
AM and FM radio:
.
.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the preset station.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will seek up or down to the next station.
Pushing the menu control switch (models
with navigation system) will show the list of
preset stations.
SAA2556
Without navigation system
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio (if so equipped):
DVD (models with navigation system):
Bluetooth® Audio (models with navigation
system):
.
.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the preset channel.
.
.
.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will go to the next or previous category.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the title number.
AUX:
Pushing the menu control switch (models
Pushing the menu control switch (models
with navigation system) will show the XM
Menu.
Pushing the menu control switch will select
an item from the DVD display.
.
with navigation system) will show the AUX
Menu.
When the transparent operation menu ap-
pears, the switch will control the menu.
iPod® (models with navigation system):
BACK switch (models with navi-
gation system)
Push this switch to go back to the previous
screen or cancel the selection if it is not
completed.
.
.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
USB (models with navigation system):
.
.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will skip to the next or previous index.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will increase/decrease the folder number
Pushing the menu control switch will show
the iPod Menu.
Volume control switches
Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to
increase or decrease the volume.
Pushing the menu control switch will show
the USB Menu.
CD:
Audio source switch
Push the audio source switch to change the
mode as follows.
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
Music Box (models with navigation sys-
tem):
.
.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will increase/decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
.
Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
.
Models with navigation system
.
Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will increase/decrease the album (folder)
number (if playing compressed audio files).
AM ? FM ? SAT ? CD/DVD ? Music Box
? USB/iPod® ? Bluetooth® Audio ? AUX
Pushing the menu control switch (models
with navigation system) will show the CD
Menu.
.
Pushing the menu control switch will show
the Music Box Menu.
4-72 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Models without navigation system
AM ? FM ? CD ? AUX ? SAT*
*: if so equipped
— The vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
— The vehicle enters a garage with
a low ceiling.
— The vehicle is covered with a car
cover.
ANTENNA
Window antenna (for Coupe models)
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
.
Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation. Otherwise,
the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any
metal parts to it. This may cause
poor reception or noise.
SAA2374
Trunk mounted antenna (for Roadster
models)
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with
a dampened soft cloth.
Removing the antenna:
You can remove the antenna if necessary.
Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by
turning counterclockwise.
CAUTION
.
To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to remove the
antenna under the following condi-
tions.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules
and electronic control system harness.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Keep the antenna as far away as
possible from the electronic control
modules.
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
WARNING
Keep the antenna wire more than 8
in (20 cm) away from the electronic
control system harness. Do not
route the antenna wire next to any
harness.
.
.
A cellular telephone should not be
used while driving so full attention
may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use
of cellular telephones while driving.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the man-
ufacturer.
If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free
cellular phone operational mode (if
so equipped) is highly recom-
mended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
.
.
Connect the ground wire from the
CB radio chassis to the body.
CAUTION
For details, consult a NISSAN deal-
er.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner
of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phone, you can set up the wireless connection
between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless tech-
nology, you can make or receive a telephone call
with your cellular phone in your pocket.
.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
Once a cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no phone connecting
4-74 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
procedure is required anymore. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position with the registered
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, behind a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
.
.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
— Your cellular phone is locked in order not
to be dialed.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone pairing procedure
specific to your phone, battery charging,
cellular phone antenna, etc.
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone
number using your voice is possible. For more
details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later
in this section; page 4-98.
.
.
.
The antenna display on the monitor will not
coincide with the antenna display of some
cellular phones.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as
well as to minimize its echoes.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
If reception between callers is unclear,
adjusting the incoming or outgoing call
volume may improve the clarity.
.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
.
.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual.
—
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list.
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, please visit
.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
COGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)” later in this section; page 4-98.
1) this device may not cause interference and
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
IC Regulatory information
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to Clarion
Co., Ltd.
SAA2518
CONTROL BUTTONS
VOICE COMMANDS
1) PHONE button
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
2) TALK/PHONE SEND button
For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RE-
4-76 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHONE SELECTION
Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the
system. To switch to connect another cellular
phone, push PHONE button and select the
“Connected Phones” key. The registered cellular
phones are shown on the list. If you select a
cellular phone that is different from the one
currently connected, the newly selected phone
will be connected to the system.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the
system may automatically download the entire
cell phone’s phonebook into the “Handset
Phonebook”. For the details about downloading
a phonebook, see “PHONE SETTING” later in
this section. If a phonebook does not auto-
matically download, the vehicle phonebook may
be set for up to 40 entries. This phonebook
allows the recording of a name to speak while
using voice recognition.
SAA2519
button,
SAA2520
2. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the compatible Bluetooth® cellular
phone to enter the PIN code.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Push the PHONE button or the
and select the “Connect Phone” key.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for the details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
When the connection process is completed,
the screen will return to the Phone menu
display.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2521
SAA2522
SAA2523
1. Push the PHONE button and select the
“Vehicle Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the method for entering the phone-
book entry. For this example, select “Enter
Number by Keypad”.
5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
to speak when using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system.
2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the
screen.
4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key.
(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN”
earlier in this section.)
6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
the name after the tone.
7. When the voicetag is successfully saved,
select the “OK” key to save the phonebook
entry.
8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the
number. Press the BACK button to return to
the Vehicle Phonebook.
There are different methods to input a phone
number. Select one of the following options
4-78 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3.
—
Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from the connected cellular phone
(depending on the phone’s compatibility).
Select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
—
Copy from the Handset
The system will show the connected cellular
phone’s phonebook that was downloaded
(depending on the phone’s compatibility).
Select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
SAA2620
SAA2523
The following editing items are available:
Editing the Vehicle Phonebook
1. Push the PHONE button and select the
“Vehicle Phonebook” key.
.
.
.
.
Entry #
Changes the displayed number of the
selected entry.
2. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list.
Name
3. Select the “Edit” key.
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
4. Select the desired item to change.
Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
Type
Select an icon from the icon list.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Voicetag
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. (See “NISSAN VOICE
RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with na-
vigation system)” later in this section.)
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at
step 3.
SAA2524
SAA2621
5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the
number.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow this procedure.
There are different methods to make a call.
Select one of the following options instead of
“Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above.
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel or the button on the steering
wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on
the display.
.
Vehicle Phonebook
Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s
Phonebook.
2. Select the “Handset Phonebook” key on the
“PHONE” menu.
.
Call History
3. Select the desired entry from the list.
Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call
downloaded from your cell phone (depend-
ing on your phone’s compatibility).
4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the
correct number from the list.
4-80 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Dial Number
.
.
.
Answer
Input the phone number manually using the
keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier
in this section.)
Accept an incoming call to talk.
Hold Call
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the
following procedures listed below.
a) Select the “Hang up” key.
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
SAA2525
RECEIVING A CALL
c) Push the
button on the steering wheel.
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to the incoming call mode. To receive a
call, perform one of the following procedures
listed below.
a) Select the “Answer” key.
b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
c) Push the
button on the steering wheel.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Keypad
Using the touch tone, send digits to the
connected party for using services such as
voicemail.
Cancel Mute
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)
on the steering wheel or turn the volume control
knob on the instrument panel while talking on
the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
SAA2526
SAA2527
DURING A CALL
PHONE SETTING
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen if necessary.
To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, push the
SETTING button on the instrument panel and
select the “PHONE” key.
.
.
.
Hang up
Edit Vehicle Phonebook
Finish the call.
To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the same
procedure as described in “VEHICLE PHONE-
BOOK” earlier in this section.
Use Handset
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute
Delete Phonebook
The vehicle phonebook entries can be deleted
all at the same time or one by one.
Mute your voice to the person.
4-82 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download Handset Phonebook
Auto Download
Download the contacts registered in a Blue-
tooth® cellular phone. Availability of this function
depends on each cellular phone. The memory
downloading procedure from the cellular phone
also varies according to each cellular phone.
See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details.
When this item is activated, the phonebook of a
hands-free phone is automatically downloaded
at the same time that the hands-free phone is
connected.
Volume
The following kinds of phone volume can be set.
Pushing the PHONE button and selecting the
“Volume” key can also operate the same
settings.
.
Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call
To increase or decrease the volume, select
the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Out-
going Call” key and adjust it with the multi-
function controller.
.
.
Automatic Hold
When this function is activated, an incoming
phone call is automatically held.
Vehicle Ringtone
When this function is activated, a specific
ringtone that is different from the cellular
phone will sound when receiving a call.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in
this section; page 4-98.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
System fails to interpret the command
correctly.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to
use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “VEHICLE PHONEBOOK” earlier in this
section.)
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-84 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (models without
navigation system)
WARNING
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
SAA2528
1. Volume control switch −/+
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position with the connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
2. PHONE SEND
3. PHONE END
4. Microphone
button
button
CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a
compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone,
you can set up the wireless connection between
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology,
you can make or receive a hands-free telephone
call in your vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth®
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
ing procedure is required. Your phone is
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hands-Free Phone System.
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
4DQPSK
.
.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.
com/bluetooth for a recommended phone
list and connecting.
— Number of Channel: 79
— This wireless equipment can’t be used for
any services related to safety because
there is the possibility of radio interfer-
ence.
.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot
charge cellular phones.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
.
.
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-
shooting guide” later in this section. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
troubleshooting help.
—
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
1) this device may not cause interference and
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
.
.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding battery charging, cellular phone
antenna, etc.
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
This wireless hands free car kit is based on
Bluetooth® technology,
Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
IC Regulatory information
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
— Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz
— Output Power: 7,94 dBm E.I.R.P
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
— Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/
4-86 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH® is
.
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon
Corporation.
also push and hold the
button for 5
.
.
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
seconds on the steering wheel at any time to
cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR
session is cancelled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
USING THE SYSTEM
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System.
Giving voice command
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push
.
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switch (+
or −) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
and release the
button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
Initialization
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the command is accepted.
.
.
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pushed before the initialization com-
pletes, the system will accept any command.
pressing the
wheel.
button on the steering
.
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
Operating tips
.
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please say again.” Repeat the command in
a clear voice.
press the
button and after the tone say,
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
ing:
“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-
mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
.
If you want to go back to the previous
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
prompts you to enter more.
NOTE:
How to say numbers
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands.
Refer to the rules and examples below.
— “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please say the “Help” command to get
information about how to use the system.
.
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “six two zero zero”
.
.
You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for
“#” at any time in any position of the phone
number. (Available only when using the
“Special Dialing” command.)
INFO
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
.
If you are controlling the telephone system
by voice command for the first time or do not
know the appropriate voice command,
speak “Help”. The system announces the
available commands.
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
— “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
.
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
.
When you speak numbers, you can speak
both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”
(available when using the “Special Dialing”
command and the “Send” command during
a call).
Example: 1-800-662-6200
Manual command selection
— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
Commands can be selected manually. While the
commands are displayed on the audio screen,
select a command by operating the audio tuning
.
.
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred, and
switch, and then push the
switch. Once a
command is manually selected, the voice
command function is cancelled. To return to
Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred.
voice command mode, push the
switch to
See “Making a call by entering a phone
number” later in this section and “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section
for more information.
.
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continuing
entering digits, if desired.
cancel the current operation, and then perform
the first procedure of voice command.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
4-88 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHONE END
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the
language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French
(in French). Use the following chart to select
the language.
While the voice recognition system is active,
press the
Press and hold the
button to go back one step.
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system at any time.
NOTE:
GETTING STARTED
You must push the
button within 5 seconds to change
the language.
button or the
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For
additional command options, refer to “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
Push
(MODE/
PHONE END)
to select
Push
(TALK/PHONE
SEND) to select
Current lan-
guage
Choosing a language
English
Spanish
French
Spanish
English
English
French
French
Spanish
SAA2557
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
To change the language, perform the following.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
PHONE SEND
2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
Push the
answer an incoming call.
button to initiate a VR session or
Connecting procedure
tion mode or press the PHONE END (
button to select a different language.”
)
NOTE:
You can also use the
system feedback and give a command at once.
button to interrupt
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
3. Push the
button.
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE”
later in this section.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-
digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,
555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”
as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the
2nd group, and “three three five four” as the
3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or
any special characters, say “Special Dial-
ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in
this section, for more information.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
1. Push the
button on the steering wheel.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
The system announces the available com-
mands.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
A
2. Say: “Connect Phone”
. The system
*
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
C
*
6. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
B
3. Say: “Add phone”
. The system acknowl-
*
the command and makes the call.
edges the command and asks you to initiate
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
C
pairing from the phone handset
.
*
1. Push the
button on steering wheel. A
. The system acknowledges
tone will sound.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular
phones.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
A
*
2. Say: “Call”
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
B
3. Say: “Phone Number”
. The system
*
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
NOTE:
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the button on
the steering wheel to reject the call.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format. If the
system has trouble recognizing the correct
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
D
phone
.
*
4-90 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
B
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime
the system is waiting for a response.
Phone Number (speak digits)
*
When prompted by the system, say the number
to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a
phone number” earlier in this section for more
details.
Call
C
“Redial”
*
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
When you push and release the
button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the
commands in each sub-menu.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
A
Name (a name)
*
If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a
number associated with a name and location
can be dialed.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
D
“Call back”
*
Use the Call Back command to dial the number
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
currently available anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
See “Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)” later in this
section to learn how to store entries.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
A menu item can also be selected by scrolling
the display with the SEEK switch and entering
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phonebook entry to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
by pushing the
button.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”
and ends the VR session.
If you want to end an action without completing
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session
is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If there are multiple locations associated with
the name, the system asks the user to choose
the location.
Special Dialing
To dial more than 10 digits or any special
characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When
the system acknowledges the command, the
system will prompt you to speak the number.
Once the name and location are confirmed, the
system begins the call.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During a call
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)
During a call there are several command options
available. Push the
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter
commands.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
button on the steering
A
*
“Transfer Entry”
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
To reconnect a call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone sys-
.
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
When prompted by the system, say the name
you would like to give the new entry.
tem, push the
button.
.
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
.
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
.
.
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
NOTE:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”
during a call. For example, if you were
directed to dial an extension by an auto-
mated system:
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR
session and returns to the call. Say “star” for
“*”, say “pound” for “#”.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new
contact phone number will be transferred from
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
.
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
4-92 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nication link.
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-
commended cellular phones.
Phonebook (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
Phonebook commands are not available
when the vehicle is moving.
A
“List names”
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system repeats the number and prompts
you for the next command. When you have
finished entering numbers or transferring an
entry, choose “Store.”
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage
entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say
the name of an entry at this menu to initiate
dialing of that entry.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
B
“Delete Entry”
*
Use the Delete Entry command to delete one
entry from the phonebook. After the system
acknowledges a command, say the name to
delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for
information about recording custom voice tags
for list entries that the system has difficulty
pronouncing.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone paired with the system. Each name
can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers
associated with it.
C
“List Names”
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook. The system recites the
phonebook entries but does not include the
actual phone numbers. When playback of the
list is complete, the system returns to the main
menu.
B
“Record name”
*
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that
the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This
feature can also be used to record voice tags
to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.
Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the
system.
Playback of the list can be stopped at any time
by pushing the
button on the steering
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle
will also delete that phonebook for that phone.
Recent Calls
D
Bluetooth Off
*
Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a
wireless connection to your phone.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
dialect users to train the system to improve
recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model
of their own voice that is stored in the system.
The system is capable of storing a different
speaker adaptation model for each connected
phone.
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to
enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.
Use the Recent Calls command to access
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
A
“Outgoing”
*
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
A
“Add Phone”
*
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier
in this section for more information.
calls made from the vehicle.
B
“Incoming”
*
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made from the vehicle.
Training procedure
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
B
“Select Phone”
*
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The
system will list the names assigned to each
phone and then prompt you for the phone you
wish to select. Only one phone can be active at
a time.
C
“Missed”
*
Use the Missed command to list the missed
calls made to the vehicle that were not
answered.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park.
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
Connect Phone
NOTE:
C
“Delete Phone”
*
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The
system will list the names assigned to each
phone and then prompt you for the phone you
4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
tion mode or press the PHONE END (
button to select a different language.”
)
4-94 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the
button.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Outgoing
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to
say the following phrases.
For information on selecting a different
language, see “Choosing a language” earlier
in this section.
call 3 1 9 0 2
9 7 pause pause 3 0 8
cancel
(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)
6. If the connected phone is already in use, the
system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow
the instructions provided by the system.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
phonebook transfer entry
dial 3 0 4 2 9
delete call back number
Incoming
call back number
call star 2 0 9 5
delete phone
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, press the
button.
dial 8 3 0 5 1
Record Name
4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0
delete redial number
phonebook list names
call 8 0 5 4 1
correction
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
Transfer entry
8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7
delete all entries
call 7 2 4 0 9
phonebook delete entry
next entry
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the
system is ready.
The SA mode will stop if:
dial star 2 1 7 0
yes
connect phone
dial 7 4 0 1 8
previous entry
delete
.
The
button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
no
.
.
The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
select
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
LOCK position.
Missed
dial 9 7 2 6 6
call 7 6 3 0 1
dial 8 5 6 9 2
Bluetooth on
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
go back
call 5 6 2 8 0
dial 6 6 4 3 7
4-96 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to
improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this
section.
1. Ensure that the phonebook entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook (phones without automatic phonebook download function)”
earlier in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phonebook.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (models with navigation
system)
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the Phone, Navigation, Information
and Audio systems in one of two modes,
Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode.
Alternate Command Mode be turned off and
Standard Mode be used for the best recognition
performance.
For the voice commands for the navigation
system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
In Standard Mode, commands that are available
are always shown on the display and announced
by the system. You can complete your desired
operation by simply following the prompts given
by the system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOG-
NITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section
for details.)
For Roadster models:
The voice recognition system cannot be oper-
ated when the soft top is not closed.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE
For advanced operation, you can use the
Alternate Command Mode. (See “NISSAN
VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COM-
MAND MODE” later in this section for details.)
When this mode is active, an expanded list of
commands can be spoken after pushing the
SAA2529
The following section is applicable when the
Standard Mode is activated.
Activating Standard Mode
The Standard Mode enables you to complete
the desired operation by simply following the
prompts that appear on the display and also are
announced by the system.
When the Alternate Command Mode is active,
perform the following steps to switch to the
Standard Mode.
TALK
switch, and the voice command
menu prompts are turned off. Review the
expanded command list, which is available when
this mode is active. Note that in this mode the
recognition success rate may be affected as the
number of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Others” key.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
To switch one mode to another, see each mode
description later in this section.
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that
4-98 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available items:
.
.
.
.
.
.
Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
Let’s Practice
Mode that allows practicing by following the
instructions of the system voice.
Using the Address Book
Tutorial for entering a destination by using
the Address Book.
SAA2530
SAA2531
Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
5. The indicator turns off and the Standard
Mode activates.
2. Select the “Others” key.
Placing Calls
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “User Guide” key.
5. Select a preferred item.
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
Displaying user guide
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system for the first time or you do not know
how to operate it, you can display the User
Guide for confirmation.
Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.
You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say
“Help”.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for
several voice commands.
Note that the Command List feature is only
available when Alternate Command Mode is
active.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2532
SAA2534
SAA2533
Getting Started
Let’s Practice
Useful tips for correct operation
Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system for the first time, you can confirm how to
use commands by viewing the Getting Started
section of the User Guide.
This mode helps learn how to use the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system.
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands cor-
rectly.
1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.
Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. When
completed, the system is ready to accept voice
2. After the message screen appears, push the
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
TALK
switch on the steering wheel.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the multi-function controller.
3. Speak the displayed number after the tone.
The evaluation screen will be displayed and
the result can be confirmed.
Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system
If you choose “Using the Address Book”,
“Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”,
you can view tutorials on how to perform these
operations using NISSAN Voice Recognition.
commands. If the TALK
switch is pushed
before the initialization completes, the display
will show the message: “Phonetic data down-
4-100 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
loaded. Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
Before starting
To get the best recognition performance from
NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the follow-
ing:
.
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent
the system from correctly recognizing the
voice commands.
.
.
.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
SAA2167
SAA2535
Speak in a natural conversational voice
without pausing between words.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”.
Giving voice commands
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
command.
to
, speak a
Selecting the “Practice” key will start the
practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” earlier
in this section.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.
Selecting the “Help” key can display the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
detailed information of the each command.
speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak
“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for
the letter “o (oh)”
How to speak numbers:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers when giving voice
commands. Refer to the following examples.
Operating tips:
.
.
Say a command after the tone.
Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the
system.
General rule
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)
Examples
.
If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say again”.
Repeat the command in a clear voice.
.
1-800-662-6200
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
.
.
Push the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen.
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers
To exit the voice recognition system, push
You can improve the recognition of phone
numbers by saying the phone number in three
groups of numbers. For example, when you try to
call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first,
and the system will then ask you for the next
three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After
recognition, the system will then ask for the last
four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this
method of phone digit entry can improve
recognition performance.
and hold the TALK
switch. The
message, “Voice canceled” will be an-
nounced.
.
.
To skip the voice guidance function and give
the command immediately, press the TALK
switch to interrupt the system. Re-
member to speak after the tone.
If you want to adjust the volume of the
system feedback, push the volume control
buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or
use the audio system volume knob while the
system is making an announcement.
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is
included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
4-102 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command List
Category Command:
Command
Phone
Action
Operates the Phone function
Operates the Navigation function
Displays the vehicle Information function
Operates the Audio function.
Displays User Guide
Navigation
Information
Audio
Help
.
Phone Command:
Command
Action
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
Call history
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
Makes a call to the dialed number.
Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call
Change Number
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Navigation Command:
Command
Action
Home
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
.
Information Command:
Command
Action
Fuel Economy
Maintenance
Displays fuel economy information.
Displays maintenance information.
Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Displays your current location.
Traffic Information
Where am I?
.
Audio Command:
Command
Action
AM
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the XM Satellite band, selecting the channel last played.
Turns on the “Music Box” hard disk drive audio system.
Starts to play a CD.
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
4-104 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
General Commands
Command
Action
Go back
Exit
Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen
Cancels Voice Recognition
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice command examples
To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function,
speaking one command is sometimes sufficient,
but at other times it is necessary to speak two or
more commands. As examples, some additional
basic operations by voice commands are
described here.
For navigation system commands, see the
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
SAA2167
SAA2535
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”
Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
3. Speak “Phone”.
4-106 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2536
SAA2537
SAA2538
4. Speak “Dial Number”.
5. Speak “8 0 0”.
6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
Selecting the “Manual Controls” key
switches the screen to the keypad to input
the phone number manually.
7. Speak “6 6 2”.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats.
If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
.
.
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
If the system does not recognize your
command, please try repeating the com-
mand using a natural voice. Speaking too
slow or too loudly may further decrease
recognition performance.
SAA2539
SAA2540
8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits” or say change number.
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”
9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.
11. Speak “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-620-6200.
Note:
.
You can also speak “800-620-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “620-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not
necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit group-
ing is recommended for improved recogni-
tion. (See “How to speak numbers” earlier in
this section.)
4-108 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2167
SAA2535
SAA2536
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”
4. Speak “International Call”.
Example 2 - Placing an international call to
the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
1. Push the TALK
steering wheel.
switch located on the
3. Speak “Phone”.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL-
TERNATE COMMAND MODE
The following section is applicable when Alter-
nate Command Mode is activated.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated,
an expanded list of commands can be used after
pressing the TALK
switch. In this mode,
available commands are not fully shown on the
display or prompted. Review the expanded
command list when this mode is active. See
examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. To improve the recog-
nition success rate, try using the Speaker
Adaptation Function available in that mode.
(See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate
Command Mode)” later in this section.) Other-
wise it is recommended that Alternate Com-
mand Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode
be used for the best recognition performance.
SAA2541
SAA2542
5. Speak “011811112223333”.
6. Speak “Dial”.
7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-
3333.
Note:
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process.
4-110 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2529
SAA2543
SAA2544
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”
key.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
Activating Alternate Command Mode
When the Standard Mode is active, perform the
following steps to switch to the Alternate
Command Mode.
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.
2. Select the “Others” key.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “Command List” key.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
Displaying command list
2. Highlight the “Others” key.
If you are controlling the system by voice
commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAA2545
SAA2546
5. Select a category from the list.
6. Select an item.
7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
multi-function controller to view the entire
list.
8. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
4-112 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of help commands
Phone Commands:
Command
Action
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number.
Vehicle Phonebook
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.
Makes a call to the incoming call number.
Handset Phonebook
Call History
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
Makes a call to the dialed number.
Makes a call to the Missed calls number.
International Call
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.
Navigation Commands:
Command
Action
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Searches for stored information in the Address Book.
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Home
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Previous Start Point
Delete Destination
Sets a route to a previous starting point.
Deletes a destination.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information Commands:
Command
Fuel Economy
Action
Displays fuel economy information.
Displays maintenance information.
Displays your current location.
Maintenance
Where am I?
Traffic Information
Weather Information
Weather Map
Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.
Displays weather information.
Displays a weather map.
Audio Commands:
Command
Action
Music Box
Turns on the “Music Box” hard disk drive audio system.
Starts to play a CD.
CD
FM
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the XM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.
Turns on the USB memory.
AM
XM
USB
Bluetooth Audio
AUX
Turns on the Bluetooth® audio player.
Turns on the AUX.
4-114 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Help Commands:
Command
Navigation Commands
Action
Command List
Displays the navigation command list.
Displays the phone command list.
Displays the audio command list.
Displays the information command list.
Displays the help command list.
Displays the User Guide.
Phone Commands
Audio Commands
Information Commands
Help Commands
User Guide
Speaker Adaptation
The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.
General Commands:
Command
Action
Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen
Cancels Voice Recognition
Go back
Exit
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
multi-function controller and push the EN-
TER button.
.
.
Voice Recognition Settings
Describes the available voice recognition
settings.
5. Highlight an item using the multi-function
controller and push the ENTER button.
Adapting the System to Your Voice
Available items:
Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Getting Started
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. When
completed, the system is ready to accept voice
Describe the basics of how to operate the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
Let’s Practice
Mode that allows practicing by following the
instructions of the system voice.
SAA2547
commands. If the TALK
switch is pushed
Using the Address Book
before the initialization completes the display will
show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded.
Please wait.” or a beep sounds.
Displaying user guide
Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which
contains basic instructions and tutorials for
several voice commands.
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following.
Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)
Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
Placing Calls
2. Select the “Others” key using the multi-
function controller and push the ENTER
button.
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
Help on Speaking
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
the multi-function controller and push the
ENTER button.
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
.
When the air conditioner is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
4-116 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
SAA2167
switch
SAA2548
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command”.
Giving voice command
1. Push and release the TALK
located on the steering wheel.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
command.
to
, speak a
Operating tips:
.
Voice commands cannot be accepted when
the icon is
.
.
The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting
the menu control switch on the steering
wheel.
.
If the command is not recognized, the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system announces, “Please say again”.
Repeat the command in a clear voice.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the follow-
ing examples:
.
.
Push the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen.
.
1-800-662-6200
If you want to cancel the command, push
— “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six
two zero zero.”
and hold the TALK
switch for 1 second.
The message “Voice canceled” will be
announced.
Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
dialing results, say phone numbers as single
digits.
.
.
To skip the voice guidance function and give
the command immediately, press the TALK
switch to interrupt the system. Re-
member to speak after the tone.
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousands”.
SAA2549
If you want to adjust the volume of the
system feedback, push the volume control
switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or use
the audio system volume knob while the
system is making an announcement.
Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak
the number “0” as “ zero”. If the letter “o ( Oh)” is
included in the house number, it will not be
recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you
speak “oh” instead of “ zero”. Please speak
“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the
letter “o (oh)”.
Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-
nate Command Mode)
The voice recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
How to speak numbers:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers when giving voice
commands. Refer to the following examples.
Having the system learn the user’s voice:
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel and select the “Others” key.
General rule
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For
example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero
zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.
4-118 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Select a voice command and then push the
ENTER button.
The voice recognition system starts.
SAA2550
SAA2551
4. Select the user whose voice is memorized
by the system.
6. Select a category to be learned by the
system from the following list.
5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation Learn-
ing” key.
.
.
.
.
.
Phone Commands
Navigation Commands
Information Commands
Audio Commands
Help Commands
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate
Command Mode)
To minimize the voice feedback from the system,
perform the following steps.
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Others” key.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key.
5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice
guidance will now be reduced when using
the Voice Recognition system.
SAA2552
SAA2553
8. The system requests that you repeat a
command after a tone.
Speaker Adaptation function settings:
Edit User Name
9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed
on the screen.
screen changes from
the command that the system requested.
to
, speak
Delete Voice Data
10. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-
tion system has learned.
Push the
switch or BACK button to return
to the previous screen.
Continuous Learning
If the system has learned the command cor-
rectly, the voice command status on the right
side of the command turns from “None” to
“Stored”.
When this item is turned to ON, you can have
the system learn the voice commands in
succession, without selecting commands one
by one.
4-120 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the
appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the
system fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-74.)
The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in
the phonebook.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
1. Make sure that the soft top is usable. If the soft top is not working, contact a NISSAN dealer.
2. Close the retractable hard top.
The system cannot be operated.*
*: For Roadster models.
3. Open and close the retractable hard top before operating the system.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
4-122 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3
Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-7
Push-button ignition switch .................................. 5-7
Operating range for engine start function............. 5-8
Push-button ignition switch operation.................. 5-8
Push-button ignition switch positions .................. 5-9
Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-10
Before starting the engine .................................. 5-10
Starting the engine ........................................... 5-11
Driving the vehicle............................................ 5-12
Automatic transmission.................................. 5-12
Manual Transmission..................................... 5-16
Parking brake .................................................. 5-20
Cruise control ................................................. 5-20
Precautions on cruise control.......................... 5-20
Cruise control operations ............................... 5-21
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-22
Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-23
Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-23
Power steering ................................................ 5-24
Parking brake break-in................................... 5-25
Brake assist.................................................... 5-26
Brake assist................................................ 5-26
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-27
Performance dampers (NISMO models) ................ 5-29
Cold weather driving......................................... 5-30
Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-30
Antifreeze................................................... 5-30
Battery ...................................................... 5-30
Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-30
Tire equipment ............................................ 5-30
Special winter equipment............................... 5-30
Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-30
Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
access to car keys (Roadster mod-
els).
.
Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed
while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the rear hatch/trunk
lid open, follow these precautions:
WARNING
.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
If the engine oil temperature is high, the
engine protection mode, which helps re-
duce the chance of engine damage, could
activate and automatically decrease en-
gine power. Driving while the engine oil
temperature is high may result in engine
damage.
1) Open all the windows.
2) Set the
air recirculation to
off and the fan control to high to
circulate the air.
sunny days, temperatures in
a
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
.
The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a qualified
mechanic whenever:
WARNING
— The vehicle is raised for service.
.
.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless car-
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
sciousness or death.
.
.
Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Do not place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury (Coupe mod-
els).
— You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with
all windows fully open, and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
— You have had an accident invol-
ving damage to the exhaust
system, underbody, or rear of
the vehicle.
Closely supervise children when
they are around cars to prevent
them from playing and becoming
locked in the trunk where they could
be seriously injured. Keep the car
locked with the trunk closed when
not in use, and prevent children’s
.
.
Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for any extended
length of time.
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
conditions are detected. Have the
vehicle inspected promptly by a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dama-
ging the three-way catalyst.
.
.
The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system com-
ponents.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
.
.
Do not race the engine while warm-
ing it up.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
.
.
Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-
its from leaded gasoline seriously
reduce the three-way catalyst’s abil-
ity to help reduce exhaust pollu-
tants.
Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-
functions in the ignition, fuel injec-
tion, or electrical systems can cause
overrich fuel flow into the three-way
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
not keep driving if the engine mis-
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-
mance or other unusual operating
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
For additional information, see “Low tire pres-
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-
ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
spare tire as soon as possible. (See
“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
Additional information
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
.
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
WARNING
.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
.
.
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors (for mod-
els not equipped with the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit).
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
low ambient temperature, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
.
If you used the Emergency Tire
Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-
ture, your NISSAN dealer will also
need to replace the TPMS sensor in
addition to repairing or replacing
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
OVER
—
—
—
Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
the tire (for models equipped with
the emergency tire puncture repair
kit).
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
WARNING
.
NISSAN recommends using only
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire
Sealant provided with your vehicle.
Other tire sealants may damage the
valve stem seal which can cause the
tire to lose air pressure (for models
equipped with the emergency tire
puncture repair kit).
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
FCC Notice:
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering
maneuvers, because these driving practices
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs
(including prescription or over-the-counter
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT
BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
so.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da.
.
.
The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried
in snow.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the tire
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. Some examples are:
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
appropriate driving lane.
WARNING
.
If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based on
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-
dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place off the road.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure
loss can also be caused by driving on under-
inflated tires.
.
The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
.
.
Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
Do not rapidly release the accelera-
tor pedal.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
.
Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-
taining the correct air pressure and visually
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle back onto the road surface until
vehicle speed is reduced.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “CHANGING A
FLAT TIRE (for models with spare tire)” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section of this
Owner’s Manual.
alcohol.
WARNING
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except
in an emergency. (The engine will stop
when the ignition switch is pushed 3
consecutive times or the ignition switch
is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
stream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the se-
verity of the injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition
switch, be sure to move the selector lever to
the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission
model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position (for manual transmission model).
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.
Although the local laws vary on what is
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is
that alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The cargo/trunk room area is not included in
the operating range but the Intelligent Key
may function.
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside
the glove box or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
SSD0825
SSD0910
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE
START FUNCTION
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
OPERATION
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting
the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmis-
sion model) or the clutch pedal (manual
transmission model), the ignition switch position
will change as follows:
1
*
specified operating range
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
and may not function properly.
.
.
.
Push center once to change to ACC.
Push center two times to change to ON.
Push center three times to change to OFF.
(No position illuminates.)
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
.
.
Push center four times to return to ACC.
Open or close any door to return to LOCK
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
during the OFF position.
position.
running.
The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft
steering lock device.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn
from the straight up position.
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
OFF
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
The ignition switch position indicator will not
illuminate.
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
To lock the steering wheel, push the
ignition switch to the OFF position. To
unlock the steering wheel, push the igni-
tion switch. If the steering lock release
malfunction indicator appears on the ve-
hicle information display, push the push-
button ignition switch again while lightly
turning the steering wheel right and left.
(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.)
Automatic transmission models: The ignition
lock is designed so that the ignition switch
cannot be switched to the LOCK position until
the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
Do not leave the vehicle with the push-
button ignition switch in ACC or ON
positions when the engine is not run-
ning for an extended period. This can
discharge the battery.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK position.
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display.
(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.
Automatic transmission models
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
.
.
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull
the Intelligent Key out of the port.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
NOTE:
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator in the vehicle infor-
mation display, replace the battery as soon
as possible. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BAT-
TERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.)
.
.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
CAUTION
.
.
.
.
Lock all doors.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
.
.
Never place anything except the
Intelligent Key in the Intelligent
Key port. Doing so may cause da-
mage to the equipment.
SSD0826
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-
CHARGE
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost
Make sure the Intelligent Key is in
the correct direction when inserting
it to the Intelligent Key port. The
engine may not start if it is in the
incorrect direction.
B
*
discharged, the guide light
of the Intelligent
blinks and the indicator appears on
the vehicle information display. (See “VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.)
.
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
A
*
Key port
.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF posi-
tion.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
1
*
port
allows you to start the engine. Make
sure that the key ring side faces backward as
illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port
until it is latched and secured.
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and
while holding, crank the engine. Release
the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model:
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
.
If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition switch
to OFF. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-
button ignition switch to start the engine.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the selector lever is in either of the above
positions.
Manual Transmission (MT) model:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to
the floor.
When racing the engine up to 4,500 rpm or
more under no load condition, the engine
will enter the fuel cut mode.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to
the P (Park) position (AT model) or move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT
model), and push the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal (AT model) or the
clutch pedal (MT model) and push the
ignition switch to start the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
push the selector lever button to shift into a
driving gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
7 speed automatic transmission
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled by a transmission con-
trol module to produce maximum efficiency and
smooth operation.
CAUTION
.
.
When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
The foot brake should be used for
this purpose.
2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,
then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
WARNING
Shown on the following pages are the recom-
mended operating procedures for this transmis-
sion. Follow these procedures for maximum
vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) D
(Drive), or manual shift mode. Al-
ways depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do
so could cause you to lose control
and have an accident.
Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot
brake pedal and push the selector lever button
before shifting the selector lever to the R
(Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift
mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully
stopped before attempting to shift the selector
lever.
.
.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before the
engine has warmed up.
This automatic transmission model is de-
signed so that the foot brake pedal must
be depressed before shifting from P (Park)
to any drive position while the ignition
switch position is ON.
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-
verse) while vehicle is moving for-
ward. Never shift to P (Park) or D
(Drive) while vehicle is moving rear-
ward. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition switch
is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position.
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
CAUTION
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine
is not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage.
Use this position only when the vehicle
is completely stopped.
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Always be sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from the P (Park) position, the N
(Neutral) position or any drive position to
the R (Reverse) position.
CAUTION
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped and the transmission is in the
P (Park) position.
SSD0827
Selector lever
Shifting
N (Neutral):
To move the selector lever,
P (Park) position:
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a
stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
:
Push the button while depressing the
brake pedal,
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the selector
lever button pushed in to move the selec-
tor lever from the N (Neutral) position or
any drive position to the P (Park) position.
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,
apply the parking brake first, then move the
selector lever to the P (Park) position.
:
:
Push the button,
D (Drive):
Just move the selector lever.
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park)
to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual
shift mode position.
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R
(Reverse). All other positions can be selected
without pushing the button.
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1M (1st):
When canceling the manual shift mode, return
the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The
transmission returns to the normal driving mode.
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or
for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D
(Drive) position, the transmission will shift to the
upper or lower range temporarily. The transmis-
sion will automatically return to the D (Drive)
position after a short period of time. If you want
to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull
and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5
seconds.
.
.
.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 7th
gear. This reduces fuel economy.
Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succes-
sion.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the transmission position indicator
in the meter.
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
SSD0828
Paddle shifter
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
Manual shift mode
?
/
?
/
?
/
?
/
?
/
?
/
7M
When the selector lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
manually by moving the selector lever up or
down, or pulling the right-side or left-side
paddle shifter.
1M
2M
3M
4M
5M
6M
When this situation occurs, the Automatic
Transmission (AT) position indicator light (on
the vehicle information display) will blink and
the buzzer will sound.
7M (7th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
6M (6th) and 5M (5th):
.
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down to 1st
gear before the vehicle comes to a
stop. When accelerating again, it is
necessary to shift up to the desired
range.
When shifting up, move the selector lever to the
+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle shifter
Use these positions when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving down
long slopes.
A
(+)
. The transmission shifts to the higher
*
range.
When shifting down, move the selector lever to
the − (down) side or pull the left-side paddle
4M (4th), 3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd):
B
shifter (−)
. The transmission shifts to the
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
*
lower range.
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
*
4. Push down the shift lock
suitable tool as illustrated.
using a
Accelerator downshift
— In D (Drive) position —
C
5. Push the selector lever button
and move
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into the lower gear, depend-
ing on the vehicle speed.
*
the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
D
*
while holding down the shift lock.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to
unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may
be moved to the desired location.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that
the transmission will be locked in any of the
forward gears according to the condition.
If the battery is discharged completely, the
steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not
move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-
ning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. This will
occur even if all electrical circuits are
functioning properly. In this case, push
the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition
switch back to the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating
condition. If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer
check the transmission and repair if ne-
cessary.
If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),
have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic
transmission system as soon as possible.
SSD0829
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
selector lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the selector lever button pushed.
To move the selector lever, perform the following
procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
A
*
3. Remove the shift lock cover
suitable tool.
using a
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
To back up, depress the shift knob and then
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position
after stopping the vehicle completely.
WARNING
The shift knob returns to its original position
when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)
position.
.
.
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1st (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral),
then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1st.
Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) (if
so equipped for Manual Transmission
models)
The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) auto-
matically adjusts the engine speed to match the
selecting gear ratio while changing gears.
SSD0536
CAUTION
Shifting
.
.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may da-
mage the clutch.
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-
shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into
an appropriate gear, and then slowly and
smoothly release the clutch pedal.
Precautions:
Fully depress the clutch pedal be-
fore shifting to help prevent trans-
mission damage.
.
.
.
Shift lever and clutch pedal operations are
not different than a conventional manual
transmission.
This vehicle is equipped with a short throw
shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth
gear changes, be sure to fully depress the clutch
pedal before operating the shift lever. If the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the
transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be
heard. Transmission damage could occur.
.
.
Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
Fully depress the clutch pedal. Insufficient
pedal depression may cause slow response
of this system.
When the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running (for example, at
a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and
release the clutch pedal with the
foot brake applied.
When the clutch pedal is depressed with
the gear still engaged, the engine speed is
kept at the proper level for the engaged
gear. Thus, the engine speed may be kept
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and upshift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-
ing to the vehicle speed.
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
high depending on the gear position and
vehicle speed.
.
When the clutch pedal is depressed with
the transmission in neutral, the system
operates for approximately 2 seconds, and
then the engine speed will decrease to the
idle speed.
.
.
When the engine coolant temperature is low
right after starting the engine, engine speed
synchronization will be delayed or may be
insufficient.
The system controls the engine speed up to
the rev limit. Note that S-MODE is not a
function that prevents over-revving resulting
from shifting mistakes.
SSD0830
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warn-
ing:
.
.
The system does not operate while the
vehicle is backing up.
The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warn-
ing will appear on the vehicle information display
and the S-MODE indicator will turn off if a
system malfunction occurs.
If the engine speed is limited lower than
usual when the engine oil temperature is
extremely high, the system will control up to
the limited engine speed.
SSD0831
If the warning appears, the S-MODE function
will not operate, but manual transmission will
operate normally and driving can be continued.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
.
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates,
the system may not operate and the S-
MODE indicator turns off.
Activating the system:
To activate the S-MODE, push the S-MODE
A
B
switch
. The S-MODE indicator
on the
*
*
tachometer will show “S”. To deactivate, push
and hold the S-MODE switch for more than 1
second. The S-MODE indicator will turn off.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the S-MODE is off, you can drive the
vehicle as a conventional manual transmission
model.
.
.
When upshifting:
The engine speed is automatically kept after
the engine speed lowers to the target
engine speed.
Note that the status of the S-MODE (on or off) is
memorized even after the ignition switch is
turned off; however, it will be initialized (off)
when the battery is disconnected.
Rapid clutch engagement before the engine
speed lowers to the target engine speed
may cause shift shock.
C
The transmission position indicator
shows
*
When depressing the clutch pedal with
the gear engaged:
the selected gear: N (Neutral), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R
(Reverse).
The engine speed is automatically kept at
the proper engine speed for the engaged
gear.
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) op-
eration:
SSD0832
The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) auto-
matically adjusts the engine speed by controlling
the engine throttle. The accelerator pedal does
not have to be depressed.
This function will not operate when low (1st)
gear is selected.
Upshift indicator (if so equipped for
Manual Transmission models)
There is a delay between the clutch pedal
operation and the S-MODE operation. Make
sure the engine speed is adjusted before
engaging the clutch again.
The manual transmission up-shift indicator is
located in the tachometer and shows the driver
the timing to shift into a higher gear by
illuminating. The use of the up-shift indicator
will help you to upshift at a constant engine
speed from any gear.
The system detects the clutch pedal and shift
lever operations, and then calculates the target
engine speed using the shifting gear position
and the vehicle speed information.
The system provides accurate engine speed
control that helps achieve quick gear shifting
and reduces shift shock on clutch engagement.
The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the
engine speed reaches about 500 rpm before the
set figure while driving, and then illuminate after
the engine speed reaches the set figure.
.
When downshifting:
The engine speed is automatically increased
to the target engine speed before the clutch
is engaged.
The engine speed for upshifting can be set on
the vehicle information display. See “Setting” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There may be a slight difference between
the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-
nation and the tachometer indication.
Suggested up-shift speeds
Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to
road conditions, the weather and individual
driving habits.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road
driving, use the highest gear suggested for that
speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and
drive according to the road conditions, which
will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the
engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
8 (13)
Gear
1st
MPH (km/h)
38 (62)
63 (102)
91 (146)
—
16 (26)
25 (40)
28 (45)
33 (53)
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
—
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in
high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
6th
—
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
50 (80)
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-
TROL
WARNING
.
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-
dicator light on the meter panel will then
blink to warn the driver.
.
Be sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving. Failure to
do so can cause brake failure and
lead to an accident.
.
.
.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
.
.
Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.
Do not use the gear shift in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SPA2110
The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control main switch is turned ON
while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,
SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-
erly set the cruise control system, perform
the following procedures.
.
Do not leave children unattended in
a vehicle. They could release the
parking brake and cause an acci-
dent.
1
To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up
To release:
.
*
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
2
slightly, push the button
and lower the
*
WARNING
3
*
lever completely
.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions:
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
.
.
.
when it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
in heavy traffic or in traffic that
varies in speed
on winding or hilly roads
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switch and release it. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.
.
.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
in very windy areas
.
To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CAUTION
.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,
drive without the cruise control.
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depres-
sing the clutch pedal when the cruise
control is set. Should this occur, de-
press the clutch pedal and turn the
main switch off immediately. Failure to
do so may cause engine damage.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
SSD0833
a) Push the CANCEL switch.
b) Tap the brake pedal.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
2. SET/COAST switch
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light
will turn off.
3. CANCEL switch
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
.
If you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/
COAST switch and reset at the cruising
speed, the cruise control will disengage.
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn
it on again.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will
illuminate.
.
.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13
km/h) below the set speed.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST
If you move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position (Automatic Transmission
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
models) or depress the clutch pedal (Man-
ual Transmission models), the cruise control
will be canceled.
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH
(40 km/h).
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and econo-
my of your new vehicle.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
.
.
.
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/COAST switch.
Failure to follow these recommenda-
tions may result in shortened engine
life and reduced engine performance.
Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch. When the vehicle attains the desired
speed, release the switch.
.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
Push, then quickly release the RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by about 1
MPH (1.6 km/h).
.
.
.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
.
.
.
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it.
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
.
.
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
.
Select a gear range suitable to road condi-
tions.
.
.
.
Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
SD1006MA
.
.
.
.
Keep the tires inflated at the correct
pressure. Improper tire pressure will in-
crease wear and waste fuel.
dents.
WARNING
.
Safe parking procedures require
that both the parking brake be
applied and the transmission placed
into P (Park) for Automatic Trans-
mission (AT) model or in an appro-
priate gear for Manual Transmission
(MT) model. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpect-
edly or roll away and result in an
accident.
.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Make sure the front wheels are properly
aligned. Improper alignment will cause pre-
mature tire wear and lower fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-
omy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
.
.
Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
.
Make sure the automatic transmis-
sion selector lever has been pushed
as far forward as it can go and
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the
center of the road if it moves.
cannot be moved without depres-
sing the foot brake pedal.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Automatic transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
Manual transmission models:
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, espe-
cially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) gear.
When parking on an uphill grade, place the
shift lever in the 1st gear.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
the street when parked on a sloping drive
way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels
as illustrated.
1
*
.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
2
*
.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB:
*
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual and can be performed by a
NISSAN dealer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster
and reduce gas mileage.
When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and
firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a
slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that
the Brake Assist System is operating.
To help save the brakes and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
until the brakes function correctly.
WARNING
.
While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE ASSIST
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on
slippery surfaces.
BRAKE ASSIST
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains.
Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force than a
conventional brake booster even with light pedal
force.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
.
Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
— When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See “TIRE AND LOADING
INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.
Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping dis-
tances.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses
a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
illuminates the ABS warning light on the
.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain
vehicle control during braking on
slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery sur-
faces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
— For detailed information, see
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-
self” section of this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.
instrument panel. The brake system then oper-
ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
.
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
(5 to 10 km/h).
Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
.
.
Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-
tion may indicate that road conditions are
hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following
conditions:
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and
indicator lights come on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically
turns off when these indicator lights are on.
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
steered path despite increased steering
input)
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
slipping drive wheel. The
if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and
the indicator will not flash. The VDC
indicator flashes
System is automatically reset to on when the
ignition switch is placed in the off position then
back to the on position.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes so note
the following:
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
.
The road may be slippery or the system may
Starting and driving 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.
indicator lights may illuminate.
surface.
.
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extre-
mely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
.
.
If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
and
indicator lights may
indicator lights may illuminate.
WARNING
illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
.
The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but
does not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slip-
pery surfaces and always drive care-
fully.
.
.
If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator lights may
illuminate.
When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked
corners, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
stabilizer bars, bushings and
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
mended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle hand-
indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of
roads.
.
When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the
may flash or both
indicator
and
indicator lights may illuminate. This
is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
ling performance, and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
5-28 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERFORMANCE DAMPERS (NISMO
models)
1. Front performance damper
2. Rear performance damper
The performance dampers are installed in the
front and rear parts of the NISMO models for
improved handling and ride.
WARNING
.
.
High-pressure nitrogen gas is
sealed inside the performance dam-
pers. Do not attempt to modify or
disassemble them.
For disposal of the performance
dampers or when scrapping the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Never burn or puncture the perfor-
mance dampers. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause serious per-
sonal injury.
SSD0876
Starting and driving 5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
TIRE EQUIPMENT
.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide
superior performance on dry pavement. How-
ever, the performance of these tires will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
speed rating and availability information.
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the
key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.
.
.
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
ANTIFREEZE
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),
check antifreeze to assure proper winter protec-
tion. For additional information, see “ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.
WARNING
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires.
.
Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick
and very hard to drive on. The
vehicle will have much less traction
or “grip” under these conditions. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until the
road is salted or sanded.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
be checked regularly. For additional information,
see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-
it-yourself” section.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
.
Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels
will lose even more traction.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE
CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
.
.
Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pave-
ment.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including
the engine block. Refill before operating the
vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
.
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
Allow greater following distances
on slippery roads.
5-30 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before reaching it. Try not to brake
while on the ice, and avoid any
sudden steering maneuvers.
WARNING
Engine block heaters are used to assist with
cold temperature starting.
.
Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical sys-
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
be seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.
To use the engine block heater
1. Turn the engine off.
.
.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads.
.
.
Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
starting the engine. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical
shock and can cause serious injury.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least
10A. Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension
cord or a grounded outlet can result
in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-32 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire............................................................ 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2
Changing a flat tire (for models with spare tire) ..... 6-2
If your vehicle overheats..................................... 6-18
Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-19
Towing recommended by NISSAN
(except for NISMO models) ............................ 6-20
Repairing flat tire (for models with emergency
Towing recommended by NISSAN
(NISMO models).......................................... 6-21
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-22
Push starting................................................... 6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
the tire pressure sensors (for mod-
els not equipped with the emer-
gency tire puncture repair kit).
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you
of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For
more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
.
.
If you used the Emergency Tire
Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-
ture, your NISSAN dealer will also
need to replace the TPMS sensor in
addition to repairing or replacing
the tire (for models equipped with
the emergency tire puncture repair
kit).
NISSAN recommends using only
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire
Sealant provided with your vehicle.
Other tire sealants may damage the
valve stem seal which can cause the
tire to lose air pressure (for models
equipped with the emergency tire
puncture repair kit).
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
WARNING
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (for models
with spare tire)
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the selector lever to the P
(Park) position (Automatic transmission
models). Move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) gear (Manual transmission mod-
els).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
MCE0001A
SCE0844
Without subwoofer
Blocking wheels
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
*
WARNING
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
.
Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the manual
transmission is shifted into R (Re-
verse), or the automatic transmis-
sion into P (Park).
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.
.
.
Never change tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.
SCE0807
With subwoofer
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting the spare tire and tools
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.
A
*
Remove jacking tools
located under the
cargo room/trunk as illustrated.
.
Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
For Coupe models, unfasten the belts and lift the
jack up to remove.
Models without subwoofer:
.
.
.
Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
B
Remove the spacer
, and turn the retainer
*
C
counterclockwise, then remove the spare
*
Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
tire.
Models with subwoofer:
Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move. This is
especially true for vehicles with
limited slip differentials.
C
Remove the spare tire cover
. Turn the
*
SCE0790
B
*
retainer
counterclockwise, remove the
and place it on the side of the
cargo room (with the flat surface facing down),
then carefully remove the spare tire.
Jack-up point
D
*
subwoofer
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
.
Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCE0661
SCE0504
Installing the spare tire
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
The T-type spare tire is designed for
emergency use. (See specific instructions
under the heading “WHEELS AND TIRES”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands as shown above.
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Models equipped with different sized
tires in the front and rear:
.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
When replacing a front tire, make sure that
the hole in the spare tire wheel is aligned
with the pin on the brake rotor.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is
recommended that wheel nuts be tigh-
tened to specifications at each lubrica-
tion interval.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
1
2
3
4
5
as illustrated (
they are tight.
,
,
,
,
) until
* * * * *
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the
vehicle completely.
.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.
COLD pressure:
SCE0845
After the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Roadster models:
WARNING
Securely store the jacking tools in the storage
area.
.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Place the spare tire cover and trunk room carpet
back in the trunk, and then close the trunk lid.
Securely store the damaged tire according to
the following procedure as illustrated.
Stowing the damaged tire and tools
.
.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.
Coupe models:
A
1. Put the damaged tire in the plastic bag
*
1. Securely store the damaged tire and jacking
tools in the storage area.
stored in the trunk.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
2. Move the passenger seat forward, and then
2. Place the spare tire cover and the cargo
room carpet over the damaged tire.
B
*
place the damaged tire
plastic bag behind the seat.
wrapped in the
3. Close the rear hatch.
3. Move the passenger seat backward to
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
secure the damaged tire.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.
gency Tire Sealant cannot perma-
nently seal a punctured tire. Con-
tinuing operation of the vehicle
without a permanent tire repair can
lead to a crash.
WARNING
CAUTION
.
.
Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an
accident or sudden stop.
.
To avoid the emergency tire punc-
ture kit being damaged during sto-
rage or use:
.
.
If you used the Emergency Tire
Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-
ture, your NISSAN dealer will also
need to replace the TPMS sensor in
addition to repairing or replacing
the tire.
— Only use the emergency tire
puncture repair kit on your ve-
hicle. Do not use it on other
vehicles.
The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions
under the heading “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
NISSAN recommends using only
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire
Sealant provided with your vehicle.
Other tire sealants may damage the
valve stem seal which can cause the
tire to lose air pressure.
— Only use the kit to inflate the
tires of your vehicle and to
check the vehicle’s tire pressure.
REPAIRING FLAT TIRE (for models with
emergency tire puncture repair kit)
— Only plug the compressor into a
12V DC car power point.
— Keep the kit free of water and
dirt.
This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The
emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emergency
Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle instead
of a spare tire. It can be used to temporarily
repair minor tire punctures.
WARNING
— Do not disassemble or modify
the kit.
.
.
After using Emergency Tire Sealant
to repair a minor tire puncture, do
not drive the vehicle at speeds
faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
— Do not drop the kit or allow hard
impacts to the kit.
If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility
that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the
emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate.
.
Do not use the emergency tire
puncture repair kit under the follow-
ing conditions. Contact a NISSAN
dealer or professional road assis-
tance.
Immediately after using the Emer-
gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor
tire puncture, take your vehicle to a
NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re-
pair or replace the tire. The Emer-
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transmission models:
— when the sealant has passed its
expiration date (shown on the
label attached to the bottle)
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
— when the cut or the puncture is
approximately 0.16 in (4 mm)
(Type A)/0.25 in (6 mm) (Type B)
or longer
5. Turn off the engine.
6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
— when the tire sidewall is da-
maged
7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
— when the vehicle has been dri-
ven with extremely low tire
pressure
WARNING
— when the tire has come off the
inside or the outside of the
wheel.
Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse) or the auto-
matic transmission into P (Park).
— when the tire wheel is damaged
— when two or more tires are flat
.
Never repair tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
SCE0846
.
Never repair tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for
professional road assistance.
Type A
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake.
4. Automatic Transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B:
.
.
Swallowing the compound is dan-
gerous. Immediately drink as much
water as possible and seek prompt
medical assistance.
1
Tire sealant bottle
Air compressor
*
2
*
3
Speed restriction sticker
*
Rinse well with lots of water if the
compound comes into contact with
skin or eyes. If irritation persists,
seek prompt medical attention.
NOTE:
For models with the emergency tire punc-
ture repair kit, a spare tire, jack and rod are
not equipped as standard. These parts are
dealer options. Contact a NISSAN dealer
about obtaining these parts. See “CHAN-
GING A FLAT TIRE (for models with spare
tire)” earlier in this section for usage of
jacking tools and tire replacement.
.
.
Keep the repair compound out of
the reach of children.
The emergency repair compound
may cause a malfunction of the tire
pressure sensors and cause the low
tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. Have the tire pressure sensor
replaced as soon as possible.
SCE0866
Before using emergency tire puncture
repair kit
Type B
Getting emergency tire puncture repair
kit
Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
located under the cargo room or in the trunk.
The repair kit consists of the following items:
.
If any foreign object (for example, a screw or
nail) is embedded in the tire, do not remove
it.
NOTE:
Do not remove any nails or screws that
have penetrated the tire when performing
repairs.
.
Check the expiration date of the sealant
(shown on the label attached to the bottle).
Never use a sealant whose expiration date
has passed.
Type A:
1
Tire sealant bottle
*
2
*
Sealant filler tubes (one is for work at a NISSAN
dealer)
Repairing tire
3
Valve core (for spare)
Valve core tool
*
WARNING
4
*
5
Air compressor
*
Observe the following precautions
when using the tire repair compound.
6
“Sealant-applied” sticker
Speed restriction sticker
*
7
*
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pound to splatter.
4. Remove the cap from the bottle and screw
2
*
the sealant filler tube into the bottle
.
5. Remove the cap of the valve from the flat
tire, and deflate the tire completely by
pushing the valve core using the valve core
3
tool
.
*
WARNING
Remove the valve core carefully. Air
pressure remaining in the tire can cause
it to fly out.
6. Remove the valve core using the valve core
4
*
tool
. Keep it free of dirt.
7. Remove the plug from the sealant filler tube
5
*
and insert the tube into the tire valve
.
8. Hold the bottle upside down and squeeze it
repeatedly until the sealant is injected into
6
the tire
. After the sealant is completely
*
SCE0775
injected, pull the tube out of the valve. Install
the tire valve core securely into the valve
using the valve core tool.
Type A
has passed.
Type A:
1
3. Shake the sealant bottle well
.
Do not throw away the empty sealant
bottle. This bottle is necessary when
the tire is repaired or replaced by a
NISSAN dealer.
1. Remove the NISSAN Genuine Emergency
Tire Sealant and the air compressor.
*
NOTE:
2. Check the expiration date of the sealant
(shown on the label attached to the bottle).
Never use a sealant whose expiration date
Make sure to shake the bottle well
before attaching the hose. Doing so
afterward may cause the repair com-
9. Put the “Sealant-applied” sticker on a flat
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
*
surface of the wheel
.
SCE0776
SCE0777
10. Put the speed restriction sticker in a location
where the driver can see it while driving.
11. Screw the tube of the air compressor
A
securely into the tire valve
. Insert its
*
B
power plug to the power outlet
in the
*
vehicle. Push the ignition switch to the ACC
position. Then turn on the compressor, and
inflate the tire to the pressure that is
specified on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label affixed to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING
.
.
Do not apply the label to the center
of the steering wheel pad, because
this can prevent the air bag from
properly functioning and cause ser-
ious injury.
WARNING
Avoid applying the label where it
can obstruct the view of the speed-
ometer and warning indicators.
The ring on the end of the air compres-
sor hose may become hot after use. To
avoid burns allow it to cool first.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure is lower than specified,
repeat the steps from 11 to 13. If the
pressure drops again or is under 19 psi
(130 kPa), the tire cannot be repaired
with this tire repair kit. Call a NISSAN
dealer.
CAUTION
Operating the air compressor for an
extended period of time can result in
damage to the compressor and will not
allow you to fill the tire to the required
air pressure. Avoid continuous opera-
tion of the compressor exceeding 10
minutes.
CAUTION
If tire pressure falls below 19 psi (130
kPa) and remains low, even after re-
peating steps 11 to 13, the tire is not
repairable using the emergency tire
puncture repair kit. Stop driving the
vehicle and contact your NISSAN dealer
or a professional towing service.
NOTE:
If the tire does not inflate to the proper
air pressure within 10 minutes, the tire
may have sustained serious damage
and cannot be repaired using the
emergency tire puncture repair kit.
You will need to contact a professional
towing service or your NISSAN dealer.
SCE0867
Type B:
1. Open the lid of the air compressor and take
out the speed restriction sticker, then put it
in a location where the driver can see it while
driving.
12. Remove the air compressor from the tire
valve. Properly stow the emergency tire
puncture repair kit in the trunk. Immediately
drive the vehicle at a speed of 50 MPH (80
km/h) or less.
CAUTION
Do not put the speed restriction label
on the steering wheel pad, the speed-
ometer or the warning light locations.
NOTE:
Driving at speeds above 50 MPH (80
km/h) can cause the vehicle to vibrate.
13. After a 10-minute or 3-mile (5-km) drive,
check the tire pressure. The temporary
repair is completed if the tire pressure does
not drop.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCE0869
SCE0870
A
3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant bottle,
and screw the bottle clockwise onto the
bottle holder. (Leave the bottle seal intact.
Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder
will pierce the seal of the bottle.)
5. Remove the protective cap
of the hose
*
and screw the hose securely onto the tire
valve. Make sure that the pressure release
B
valve
is securely tightened. Make sure
*
that the air compressor switch is in the OFF
(*) position, and then insert its power plug
into the power outlet in the vehicle.
4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on the
flat tire.
SCE0868
1
2
2. Take the hose
and the power plug
*
*
out of the air compressor. Remove the cap
of the bottle holder from the air compressor.
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
may be seriously damaged and the tire
cannot be repaired with this tire repair
kit. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
The compressor tire pressure gauge
may show a pressure reading of 87 psi
(600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while
inflating the tire. The pressure gauge is
indicating the pressure inside the sea-
lant can. When the sealant has been
injected into the tire the pressure
gauge will drop and indicate actual tire
pressure.
7. When the tire pressure is at the specified
amount, turn the air compressor off. If the
pressure cannot be inflated to the specified
amount, the air compressor can be turned
off at the minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi).
Remove the power plug from the power
outlet and quickly remove the hose from the
tire valve. Attach the protective cap and
valve cap. Properly stow the emergency tire
puncture repair kit in the trunk.
WARNING
.
.
To avoid serious personal injury
while using the emergency tire
puncture repair kit:
SCE0871
CAUTION
6. Push the ignition switch to the “ACC”
position. Then turn the compressor switch
to the ON (−) position and inflate the tire up
to the pressure that is specified on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver’s side center pillar if possible, or to the
minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi). Turn the air
compressor off briefly in order to check the
tire pressure with the pressure gauge.
— Securely tighten the compressor
hose to the tire valve. Failure to
do so can cause the sealant to
spray into the air and get into
your eyes or on the skin.
To avoid serious personal injury when
stowing the emergency tire puncture
repair kit:
—
Keep the sealant bottle screwed
into the compressor. Failure to do
so can cause the sealant to spray
into the air and get into your eyes or
on the skin.
Do not stand directly beside the
damaged tire while it is being
inflated because of the risk of the
rupture. If there are any cracks or
bumps, turn the compressor off
immediately.
If the tire is inflated to higher than the
specified pressure, lower the tire pressure
by releasing air with the pressure release
valve.
8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes
or 3 km (2 miles) at a speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or less.
If the tire pressure does not increase to 180
kPa (26 psi) within 10 minutes, the tire
9. After driving, make sure that the air com-
pressor switch is in the OFF position, then
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be
followed.
screw the hose securely onto the tire valve.
Check the tire pressure with the pressure
gauge. The temporary repair is completed if
the tire pressure does not drop.
puncture, take your vehicle to a
NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re-
pair or replace the tire. The Emer-
g e n c y T i r e S e a l a n t c a n n o t
permanently seal a punctured tire.
Continuing operation of the vehicle
without a permanent tire repair can
lead to a crash.
WARNING
Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the
pressure that is specified on the tire and
loading information label before driving.
.
.
.
If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or death.
It could also damage your vehicle.
10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the steps
from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops again or
under 130 kPa (19 psi), the tire cannot be
repaired with this tire repair kit. Contact
a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
If you used Emergency Tire Sealant
to repair a minor tire puncture, your
NISSAN dealer will also need to
replace the TPMS sensor in addition
to repairing or replacing the tire.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.
The sealant bottle and hose can not be
reused to repair another punctured tire.
Contact a NISSAN dealer to purchase
replacements.
NISSAN recommends using only
NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire
Sealant provided with your vehicle.
Other tire sealants may damage the
valve stem seal which can cause the
tire to lose air pressure.
Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulphuric acid solution
which can cause severe burns. If the
fluid should come into contact with
anything, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
After repairing tire
See a NISSAN dealer for tire repair/replacement
as soon as possible.
WARNING
.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
.
.
After using Emergency Tire Sealant
to repair a minor tire puncture, do
not drive the vehicle at speeds
faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
Immediately after using Emergency
Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire
.
Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
In case of emergency 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
protectors (for example, goggles or
industrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.
.
.
Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.
Your vehicle has an automatic en-
gine cooling fan. It could come on at
any time. Keep hands and other
objects away from it.
SCE0791
sion models). Move the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position (Manual transmission
models). Switch off all unnecessary elec-
trical systems (light, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause
personal injury.
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
C
wrung out moist cloth
explosion hazard.
to reduce
*
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
A
A
B
, position the two vehicles (
and
)
*
*
*
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
1
2
*
3
4
illustrated (
?
?
?
).
*
*
*
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the steering wheel will lock
and cannot be turned. Supply power
2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmis-
6-16 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
using jumper cables before pushing
the ignition switch and disengaging
the steering lock.
7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
CAUTION
4
*
3
*
2
*
1
*
cable (
?
?
?
).
.
.
.
Automatic transmission models
cannot be push-started or tow-
started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
CAUTION
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
.
.
Always connect positive (+) to posi-
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (as illustrated) — not to the
battery.
Three way catalyst equipped models
should not be started by pushing
since the three way catalyst may be
damaged.
9. Put the battery cover on.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that clamps do
not contact any other metal.
Never try to start the vehicle by
towing it; when the engine starts,
the forward surge could cause the
vehicle to collide with the tow
vehicle.
A
*
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
A
vehicle
at about 2,000 rpm, and start
*
the engine of the vehicle being jump started
B
*
.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, push the
ignition switch to the OFF position
and wait 10 seconds before trying
again.
In case of emergency 6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
CAUTION
3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing
a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a
fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the
temperature gauge indication returns to
normal.
.
.
Do not continue to drive if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause engine damage or a vehicle
fire.
7. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir with the engine
running. Add coolant to the reservoir if
necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at
the nearest NISSAN dealer.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out,
possibly causing serious injury.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
Do not open the hood further until no steam
or coolant can be seen.
.
Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps:
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic
transmission models). Move the shift lever to
the N (Neutral) position (Manual transmis-
sion models).
6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.
The radiator hoses and radiator should not
leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling
fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
6-18 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service
operators are familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-
ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
.
.
Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
.
.
When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and drivetrain are in working condi-
tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies
must be used.
Always attach safety chains before
towing.
In case of emergency 6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ism.
.
If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the
ground:
— Push the ignition switch to the
ON position and turn off all
accessories.
— Always release the parking
brake.
— Move the transmission shift le-
ver to the N (Neutral) position.
SCE0792
— Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models
only:
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
necessary to tow the vehicle with
the front wheels raised, always use
towing dollies under the rear
wheels.
NISSAN (except for NISMO models)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.
.
.
Rear wheels on the ground:
Speed: Below 50 MPH (80
km/h)
Distance: Less than 50 miles
(80 km)
.
When towing rear wheel drive mod-
els with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies: Push
the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by select-
ing the LOCK position. This may
damage the steering lock mechan-
CAUTION
Four wheels on the ground:
Speed: Below 70 MPH (112
km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(800 km)
.
Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the
ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expen-
sive damage to the drivetrain. If it is
— If the speed or distance must
necessarily be greater, remove
6-20 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the propeller shaft before tow-
ing to prevent damage to the
drivetrain.
SCE0836
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN (NISMO models)
CAUTION
Do not tow NISMO models with any
wheel on the ground, or with the front
or rear wheels raised, because this may
cause damage to the front bumper with
an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper
with an aerodynamic diffuser or ex-
haust pipes.
NISSAN recommends that you place the vehicle
on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
In case of emergency 6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
For NISMO models: When the front license
plate and bracket are installed, temporarily
remove them. (See “INSTALLING FRONT
LICENSE PLATE” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for the in-
stallation procedures.) A screwdriver is
supplied with the jacking tools for removal.
WARNING
.
.
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode
and result in serious injury. Parts of
your vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged.
3
2. Securely install the vehicle recovery hook
*
(stored with jacking tools) as illustrated.
Attach the tow strap to the recovery hook.
4
*
Do not use the tie down hooks
vehicle recovery.
for towing or
Pulling a stuck vehicle
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in
the original place after use.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery
device.
Replace the recovery hook cover (except for
NISMO models) or the front license plate (for
NISMO models).
CAUTION
.
.
Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to the vehicle recovery
hooks or main structural members
of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle body will be damaged.
SCE0793
1. Access the mounting hole for the recovery
hook.
Except for NISMO models: To remove the
Do not use the vehicle tie downs to
free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc.
A
1
cover
, first unhook the claws
using
*
*
a suitable tool wrapped in a cloth, and then
2
pull the lower side of the cover
.
*
6-22 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mission models) or 1st and R (Reverse)
(manual transmission models).
.
.
Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-
cle tie downs or recovery hooks.
.
.
Apply the accelerator as little as possi-
ble to maintain the rocking motion.
Always pull the cable straight out
from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull on the vehicle at an angle.
Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (automatic transmission models)
or 1st and R (Reverse) (manual trans-
mission models).
.
.
Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
Pulling devices such as ropes or
canvas straps are not recommended
for use in vehicle towing or recov-
ery.
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
.
Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive) (automatic trans-
In case of emergency 6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-24 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior................................................ 7-2
Washing ...................................................... 7-2
Waxing ........................................................ 7-3
Removing spots............................................. 7-4
Wheels........................................................ 7-4
Chrome parts................................................ 7-5
Tire dressing................................................. 7-5
Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-5
Air fresheners................................................ 7-6
Floor mats .................................................... 7-6
Seat belts .................................................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-7
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion...................................................... 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion...................................................... 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
.
For Roadster models, observe the
following:
CAUTION
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle
as soon as you can:
.
Do not use an automatic car wash
or a high pressure car wash. The
soft top may be damaged.
.
Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func-
tion properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
.
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
.
Avoid applying direct water pres-
sure, such as high pressured
water from household hoses, on
the lining of the soft top and
vehicle body. Avoid applying con-
tinuous water on the parts around
the soft top and the windows.
These may cause water to leak
into the inside of your vehicle.
.
.
after driving on coastal roads
when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface
.
when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
.
.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical
detergents, gasoline or solvents.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Soft top care and cleaning (Roadster
models)
Proper care and handling should be observed to
maintain a good appearance of the soft top.
Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface
to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions
shown in this section.
water.
.
Do not apply direct water pressure,
such as high pressured water from
household hoses, on the lining of
the soft top and vehicle body, as this
may cause water to leak into the
inside of your vehicle.
It is not necessary to wash the soft top every
time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the
top regularly before it becomes quite dirty.
Leaving the soft top dirty or soiled for a long
period will cause deterioration to the quality of
the top material.
After cleaning, always be sure the top and its
storage are completely dry before opening the
top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may
cause interior water damage, water stains or
mildew on the top.
SAI0046
Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft
brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of
clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash
using a mild detergent, such as a general
cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a
general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top
again with plenty of clean water to remove all
traces of soap.
NISMO models
CAUTION
Do not use an automatic car wash for
NISMO models. The rear spoiler may be
damaged.
WAXING
CAUTION
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
reapplying wax.
.
.
Do not use strong household soap,
strong chemical detergents, gaso-
line or solvents.
If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,
immediately wash it off with clean
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLASS
proper product.
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
.
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
CAUTION
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
.
When cleaning the inside of the
windows, do not use sharp-edged
tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-
based disinfectant cleaners. They
could damage the electrical conduc-
tors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defroster elements.
Aluminum alloy wheels
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a
mild soap solution, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt
could discolor the wheels if not removed.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory stores.
.
If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,
immediately wash it off with clean
water (Roadster models).
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
UNDERBODY
.
Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.
WHEELS
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
underbody and suspension. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to
maintain their appearance.
.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The
wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.
.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
.
Rinse the wheel to completely re-
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry soft cloth.
.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
may react with the coating and form a com-
pound. This compound may come off the tire
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
WARNING
.
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
.
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
CAUTION
.
.
Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
Small dirt particles can be abrasive
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLOOR MATS
and damaging to the leather sur-
faces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-
monia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.
The use of NISSAN floor mats can extend the
life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to
clean the interior. No matter what mats are
used, be sure they are fitted for your
vehicle and are properly positioned in the
footwell to prevent interference with pedal
operation. Mats should be maintained with
regular cleaning and replaced if they become
excessively worn.
.
.
Only use fabric protectors approved
by NISSAN.
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
SAI0044
AIR FRESHENERS
Floor mat positioning aid
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your
vehicle model. The front floor mats have
grommet holes in them. To install, simply
position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
hook through the floor mat grommet hole while
centering the mat in the footwell.
.
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to hang
free and not contact an interior surface.
.
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Periodically check to make certain that the mats
are properly positioned.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-
BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in
the shade before using them.
.
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section.
.
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
.
.
.
.
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing where
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt
is used.
CAUTION
.
.
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate
of corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
Appearance and care 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
consult a NISSAN dealer.
7-8 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2
Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2
General maintenance ...................................... 8-2
Where to go for service................................... 8-2
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5
Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-7
VQ37VHR engine model.................................. 8-7
Engine cooling system......................................... 8-8
Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-9
Engine oil......................................................... 8-9
Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-9
Changing engine oil and filter............................ 8-9
Automatic transmission fluid................................ 8-11
Power steering fluid.......................................... 8-12
Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-12
Brake fluid.................................................. 8-13
Clutch fluid................................................. 8-13
Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-13
Battery .......................................................... 8-14
Jump starting .............................................. 8-16
Variable voltage control system............................ 8-16
Drive belts...................................................... 8-16
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-17
Replacing spark plugs................................... 8-17
Air cleaner...................................................... 8-18
Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-18
Brakes........................................................... 8-20
Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-20
Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-20
Fuses............................................................ 8-20
Engine compartment ..................................... 8-20
Passenger compartment ................................ 8-22
Intelligent Key battery replacement ....................... 8-22
Lights............................................................ 8-24
Coupe....................................................... 8-24
Roadster.................................................... 8-25
Headlights.................................................. 8-26
Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-26
Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-28
Tire pressure............................................... 8-28
Tire labeling ................................................ 8-31
Types of tires .............................................. 8-33
Tire chains.................................................. 8-34
Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-35
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
(if so equipped) ........................................... 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with long
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well
as its emission and engine performance.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
Performing general maintenance checks re-
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”
later in this section.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper
maintenance care. You are a vital link in the
maintenance chain.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up to date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership information systems.
They are completely qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, both required and op-
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to
meet the maintenance requirements on your
vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood, operate properly. Also
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal day-
to-day operation. They are essential for proper
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as pre-
scribed.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the
NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.
Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated on this
vehicle because the front tires are a different
size than the rear tires.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all
latched positions.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the
vehicle should pull to either side while driving on
a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven
or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
wheel alignment.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan-
ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in
the P (Park) position without applying any
brakes.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, other-
wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
late. For additional information, see “CLEANING
EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”
section.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater
or air conditioner.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected
immediately.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
the level with the engine off. Check the lines for
proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure
that the brake and clutch fluid levels are
between the MAX and MIN lines on the
reservoirs.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is
frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte-
nance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed.
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
cable before working near the fan.
.
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-
cause the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is
off.
.
It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
WARNING
.
Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely
and block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from moving. For man-
ual transmission models, move the
shift lever to N (Neutral). For auto-
matic transmission models, move
the selector lever to P (Park).
CAUTION
.
.
Always wear eye protection when-
ever you work on your vehicle.
.
.
Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
If you must run the engine in an
enclosed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.
Avoid direct contact with used en-
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
disposed engine oil, coolant, and/
or other vehicle fluids can damage
the environment. Always conform to
local regulations for disposal of
vehicle fluid.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by a jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
.
.
.
.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when per-
forming any parts replacement or
repairs.
.
.
Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the
battery.
Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized com-
ponent while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without warn-
ing, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF position and the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component
harnesses disconnected while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information” section.)
If you must work with the engine
You should be aware that incomplete or
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, we recommend that
it be done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
12. Engine coolant reservoir
SSI0510
6. Brake fluid reservoir
VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission mod-
els)
1. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Battery
8. Power steering fluid reservoir
9. Window washer fluid reservoir
10 Air cleaner
3. Radiator filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
11. Drive belt location
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-
ant solution. The antifreeze solution contains
rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not necessary.
or distilled water. The use of other
types of coolant solutions may damage
the engine cooling system.
Outside
Demineralized
temperature
Antifreeze
water or dis-
tilled water
WARNING
down to
8F
−30
8C
.
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Wait until the
engine and radiator cool down.
Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “IF
YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
−35
50%
50%
SDI2043
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
.
The radiator is equipped with a
pressure type radiator cap. To pre-
vent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
2
MIN
, open the reservoir cap and add
*
1
*
coolant up to the MAX
level. If the reservoir
is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient
coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with
coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to
1
CAUTION
the reservoir up to the MAX level
.
*
When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equiva-
lent with the proper mixture ratio of
50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine
coolant.
If the cooling system requires coolant
frequently, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
and pour recommended oil through the
3
*
opening. Do not overfill
.
Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the break-
in period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
CAUTION
WARNING
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty.
.
.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant
when the engine is hot.
SDI2348
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
.
.
Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
Keep coolant out of reach of chil-
dren and pets.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15
minutes.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
1
*
level. It should be within the range
. If the
2
*
oil level is below
, remove the oil filler cap
.
Place the safety jack stands under the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle jack-up points.
(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine
oil filter change is needed.)
.
A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.
2
*
4. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by
hand.
5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.
a. Remove the small plastic clips at the
center of the undercover.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean rag.
b. Then remove the bolts that hold the
undercover in place.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old rubber
gasket remaining on the mounting sur-
face of the engine. Failure to do so
could lead to engine damage.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.
SDI2335
Engine oil and filter
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
more than 2/3 turn.
1
3. Remove the drain plug
with a wrench
*
and completely drain the oil.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
.
Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
(29 to 39 N·m)
.
Check your local regulations.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
Do not use excessive force.
c. Insert the clip through the undercover
into the hole in the frame, then push the
center of the clip in to lock the clip in
place.
9. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler
cap securely.
CAUTION
d. Install the bolts that hold the undercover
in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts
or over-tighten them.
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section for drain
and refill capacity. The drain and refill
capacity depends on the oil temperature
and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only. Always use the dipstick to
determine the proper amount of oil in the
engine.
.
.
Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF will cause deterioration in dri-
veability and automatic transmis-
sion durability, and may damage
the automatic transmission, which
is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
.
.
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Install the engine undercover into position as
the following steps.
.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip
out.
b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-
tion.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING FLUID
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
For further brake and clutch fluid information,
see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not overfill.
Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or
equivalent.
WARNING
.
.
Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
and clutch system.
Be sure to clean the filler cap before
removing.
SDI1765A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
CAUTION
The fluid level should be checked with the
Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, wash the surface with
water.
1
engine off using the HOT range (
: HOT
*
2
*
MAX.,
: HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of
122 to 1768F (50 to 808C) or using the COLD
3
*
4
*
range (
: COLD MAX.,
: COLD MIN.) at
fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F (0 to 308C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap
and fill through the opening.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
SDI2025A
SDI1906A
SDI2349
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add window washer fluid when the low
window washer fluid warning light comes on.
BRAKE FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
below the MIN line
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line
added frequently, the system should be checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid
level is below the MIN line
NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
If fluid must be added frequently, the system
should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.
1
*
1
*
or the brake warning
, add Genuine
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window
washer fluid into the tank opening.
2
.
*
2
. If fluid must be
*
Add a washer solvent to the water for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
window washer fluid.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY
.
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
perform the procedure in the following order.
Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel
may contact and be damaged.
.
.
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
1. Unlock and open the driver side door. Do
not close the door.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
2. Open the hood.
.
.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
3. Connect the negative (−) battery terminal.
Then close the hood.
4. Fully open the driver side door window.
5. Close the driver side door and the window.
CAUTION
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
When the battery cable is removed from
the battery terminal, do not close either
of front doors. The automatic window
adjusting function will not work, and
the side roof panel may be damaged.
WARNING
.
Do not expose the battery to flames
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
To disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal,
perform the procedure in the following order.
Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel
may contact and be damaged.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
1. Close the windows.
2. Open the hood.
3. Close and lock all the doors.
4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal.
5. Securely close the hood.
.
Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
To connect the negative (−) battery terminal,
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
.
.
When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
DI0137MF
SDI1480E
Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
1
battery cover if it is necessary). It should be
line.
*
1
*
between the UPPER LEVEL
and LOWER
If the side of the battery is not clear, check
the distilled water level by looking directly
2
*
LEVEL
lines.
A
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level to the indicator in each
filler opening. Do not overfill.
above the cell; the condition
indicates
*
B
OK and the conditions
*
needs more to
be added.
3
*
3
*
1. Remove the cell plugs
.
3. Tighten cell plugs
.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVE BELTS
JUMP STARTING
CAUTION
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP
STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
Do not ground accessories directly
to the battery terminal. Doing so will
bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely.
Use electrical accessories with the
engine running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures
the amount of electrical discharge from the
battery and controls voltage generated by the
generator.
SDI2119
VQ37VHR engine
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Alternator
3. Crankshaft pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor
5. Drive belt auto-tensioner
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belts. The engine could rotate unex-
pectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.
Be sure the engine and the ignition
switch are off and that the parking
brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer
for servicing.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped
spark plugs as frequently as the conventional
type spark plugs since they will last much longer.
Follow the maintenance schedule in “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not
reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR CLEANER
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
cleaner housing and the cover with a damp
cloth.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
WARNING
.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it
is not there, and the engine back-
fires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with the air cleaner removed,
and be careful when working on the
engine with the air cleaner removed.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
SDI2350
1
Remove the retainers
out the filter element
as illustrated and pull
*
2
*
.
The filter element should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
intervals. See “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide” for maintenance intervals. When
replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDI2359
REPLACING
CAUTION
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
.
.
After wiper blade replacement, re-
turn the wiper arm to its original
position;
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A
2. Push the release tab
, and then move the
*
1
wiper blade down the wiper arm
pushing the release tab to remove.
while
*
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
SDI2362
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until a click sounds.
A
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle
.
*
Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
damaged from wind pressure.
This may cause improper windshield washer
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any
4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in
the groove.
B
*
objects with a needle or small pin
careful not to damage the nozzle.
. Be
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKES
FUSES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
affect the function or performance of the brake
system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information, see the
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
SDI1479A
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
sound is heard.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF or LOCK position and the headlight
switch is turned to OFF.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does not
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Open the engine hood and remove the
cover on the battery and the fuse/fusible link
holder.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located
in the passenger compartment fuse box.
SDI1754
A
5. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
*
B
fuse
. Spare fuses are stored in the
passenger compartment fuse box.
*
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT
SDI2361
2. Open the fuse box lid.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A
*
.
CAUTION
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
SDI2451
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF or LOCK position and the headlight
switch is turned to OFF.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replace the battery as follows:
and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following
measures:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2032 or equivalent
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
—
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna.
SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts
Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver.
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
1
, and then push them together until it is
*
2
*
securely closed
.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom case.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential in-
stallation. This equipment generates, uses
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
COUPE
1. Headlight (high- and low-beam)
2. Map light
3. Front park light
4. Front side marker light
5. Front turn signal light
6. Side turn signal light
7. High-mounted stop light
8. Cargo light
9. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/tail/stop/
side marker/back-up light)
10. License plate light
11. Rear fog light (if so equipped)
SDI2351
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROADSTER
1. Headlight (high- and low-beam)
2. Map light
3. Front park light
4. Front side marker light
5. Front turn signal light
6. Side turn signal light
7. High-mounted stop light
8. Trunk light
9. Cargo area courtesy light
10. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/tail/stop/
side marker/back-up light)
11. License plate light
12. Rear fog light (if so equipped)
SDI2448
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHTS
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
Headlight*
High/Low beams (Xenon)
Front turn signal light*
Front park light*
35
28/8
5
D2S
7444NA
W5W
—
Replacing
Front side marker light*
Side turn signal light*
Rear combination light*
back-up
LED
LED
—
WARNING
16
21
LED
21
5
W16W
HIGH VOLTAGE
turn signal
WY21W
stop/tail/side marker
Rear fog light (if so equipped)*
License plate light*
—
T20
T10
—
When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer. For additional information, see
“HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
Map light
8
Vanity mirror light
2
—
Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster)*
Cargo light (Coupe)*
Trunk light (Roadster)*
High-mounted stop light*
5
—
3.4
3.4
LED
—
—
—
Use the same number and wattage shown in the
following chart as originally installed.
*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
SDI2352
Map light
SDI1679
SDI1839
Vanity mirror light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
vehicle beyond this capacity.
Overloading your vehicle may
result in reduced tire life, unsafe
operating conditions due to pre-
mature tire failure, or unfavor-
able handling characteristics
and could also lead to a serious
accident. Loading beyond the
specified capacity may also re-
sult in failure of other vehicle
components.
TIRE PRESSURE
.
.
Most tires naturally lose air over time.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
over potholes or other objects or if the
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
.
.
Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire
life and vehicle handling.
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
WARNING
.
.
Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
Tire inflation pressure
The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehi-
cle weight capacity is indicated
on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label. Do not load your
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
* Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4
* Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
* Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”
later in this section.
6
* Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped)
SDI2462
Tire and Loading Information label
2
* Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE
LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information”
section.
1
* Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coupe models (except for NISMO models):
COLD TIRE
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of the
valve stem briefly with the tip of the
gauge stem to release pressure. Re-
check the pressure and add or release
air as needed.
INFLATION
SIZE
PRES-
SURE
225/50R18 240 kPa,
FRONT
95W
35 PSI
ORIGINAL
TIRE
245/40R19 240 kPa,
94W 35 PSI
245/45R18 240 kPa,
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
96W
35 PSI
SDI1949
275/35R19 240 kPa,
96W
35 PSI
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
T145/80-
D17
420 kPa,
60 PSI
SPARE
TIRE
T145/70-
R18
420 kPa,
60 PSI
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or
force the valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard while
checking the pressure, reposition the
gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specifica-
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadster models (except for NISMO mod-
els):
NISMO models:
COLD TIRE
INFLATION
PRES-
COLD TIRE
SIZE
INFLATION
SIZE
SURE
PRES-
SURE
FRONT
ORIGINAL
TIRE
245/40R19 240 kPa,
225/50R18 260 kPa,
FRONT
98Y
35 PSI
95W
38 PSI
ORIGINAL
TIRE
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
245/40R19 240 kPa,
94W 35 PSI
245/45R18 260 kPa,
285/35R19 240 kPa,
99Y
35 PSI
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
SPARE
TIRE
420 kPa,
60 PSI
SDI1575
96W
38 PSI
T145/70R18
Example
275/35R19 240 kPa,
TIRE LABELING
96W
35 PSI
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the side-
wall of all tires. This information identifies
and describes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety stan-
dard certification. The TIN can be used to
identify the tire in case of a recall.
T145/80-
D17
420 kPa,
60 PSI
SPARE
TIRE
T145/70-
R18
420 kPa,
60 PSI
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight each
tire can support. You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
SDI1606
SDI1607
Example
Example
1
2
* Tire size (example: P215/60R16
* TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
94H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed
for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires
have this information.)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department
of Transportation”. The symbol can be
placed above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification Number.
2. Three-digit number (215): This number
gives the width in millimeters of the tire
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-
tional)
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TYPES OF TIRES
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6. Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 3103 means the 31st week of
2003. If these numbers are missing,
then look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
WARNING
6
* Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
.
When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the same
type (Example: Summer, All Season
Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
or Snow) and construction.
A
7
* The word “radial”
NISSAN dealer may be able to help
you with information about tire type,
size, speed rating and availability.
3
* Tire ply composition and material
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
has radial structure.
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
.
Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
8
* Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
4
* Maximum permissible inflation pres-
Other tire-related terminology:
sure
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model
name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
5
* Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
than All Season tires and may be more appro-
priate in some areas.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
brand, construction and tread pattern on all four
wheels, and the same sizes as the original tires.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
clearances between the tire and the closest
vehicle suspension or body component required
to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
clearances are determined using the factory
equipped tire size. Other types may damage
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
commended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire
chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
handling and performance may be adversely
affected.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Tire chains/cables should not be in-
stalled on 19-inch size tires. Doing so
will cause damage to the vehicle. If you
plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install 18-inch size tires on your
vehicle.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according
to location. Check the local laws before instal-
ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
tire.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle
because the front tires are a different size
than the rear tires.
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
.
Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician, because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent
the rear wheels from being installed in
place of the front wheels. The spare tire
can be installed in place of the front and
rear wheels. When installing the spare tire
in the front wheel, the hole in the spare tire
wheel must be aligned with the pin on the
brake rotor.
.
.
Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious perso-
nal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
SDI1663
1. Wear indicator
WARNING
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
.
.
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
WARNING
.
Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bul-
ging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-
TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for recommended types
and sizes of tires and wheels.)
.
The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
Wheel balance
WARNING
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
.
The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use of
tires of different brands, construc-
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or
tread patterns can adversely affect
the ride, braking, handling, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and bum-
per height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the
NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.
Do not install a deformed wheel or
tire even if it has been repaired.
Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail
without warning.
Care of wheels
.
If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear,
degrade vehicle handling character-
istics and/or interference with the
brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
ence can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/
shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of
this manual for wheel off-set dimen-
sions.
See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-
pearance and care” section for details about
care of the wheels.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY (T-
type) spare tire) (if so equipped)
Observe the following precautions if the T-type
spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle
could be damaged or involved in an accident.
.
.
The use of retread tire is not re-
commended.
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
WARNING
.
The T-type spare tire should be used
for emergency use. It should be
replaced with the standard tire at
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE RE-
PAIR KIT (if so equipped)
the first opportunity to avoid possi-
ble tire or differential damage.
wheels). Use tire chains only on the
two rear original tires.
The emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-
gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle
instead of a spare tire. It can be used to
temporarily repair minor tire punctures.
.
.
Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
stalled. Avoid sharp turns and
abrupt braking while driving.
.
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility
that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the
emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate.
Periodically check spare tire infla-
tion pressure. Always keep the
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure
of the full size spare tire (if so
equipped) at the recommended
pressure for standard tires, as in-
dicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label. For Tire and
Loading Information label location,
see “Tire and Loading Information
label” in the index of this manual.
.
.
Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
Do not use more than one spare tire
at the same time.
See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section for more details.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
chains will not fit properly and may
cause damage to the vehicle.
Because the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, ground clearance is
reduced. To avoid damage to the
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
Also do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.
.
.
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire installed do not drive your
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
MPH (80 km/h).
When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on
the front wheels and original tire
used on the rear wheels (drive
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2
Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
Engine......................................................... 9-7
Wheels and tires............................................ 9-8
Dimensions................................................... 9-9
Removing air deflectors
(except for NISMO models) ................................ 9-16
Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-17
Terms........................................................ 9-17
Measurement of weights ................................ 9-19
Towing a trailer................................................ 9-19
Flat towing ..................................................... 9-20
Automatic transmission.................................. 9-20
Manual Transmission..................................... 9-20
Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-20
Treadwear .................................................. 9-20
Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-20
Temperature A, B and C................................ 9-21
Emission control system warranty......................... 9-21
Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 9-22
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country................................................ 9-10
Vehicle identification ......................................... 9-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ........... 9-10
Vehicle identification number (chassis number).... 9-10
Engine serial number .................................... 9-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 9-11
Emission control information label .................... 9-11
Tire and loading information label..................... 9-12
Air conditioner specification label..................... 9-12
Installing front license plate ................................ 9-13
Except for NISMO models.............................. 9-13
For NISMO models ...................................... 9-15
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test
(US only) ....................................................... 9-22
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-23
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-24
In the event of a collision ............................... 9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended specifications
US measure
19 gal
Imp measure
15-7/8 gal
Liter
71.9
Fuel
See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
Without oil filter change
Cooling system
5-1/8 qt
4-7/8 qt
4-3/8 qt
4 qt
4.9
4.6
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2, *3
Viscosity SAE 5W-30*2, *3
With reservoir
Reservoir
9 qt
7/8 qt
9-1/8 qt
7/8 qt
—
7-1/2 qt
3/4 qt
7-5/8 qt
3/4 qt
—
8.5
0.8
8.6
0.8
—
Automatic transmission model
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
With reservoir
Reservoir
Manual transmission model
Automatic transmission fluid
Manual transmission gear oil
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*4
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
—
—
—
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic
gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*5
Differential gear oil
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake and clutch fluid
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
—
—
—
—
—
—
HFC-134a (R-134a)*8
NISSAN UV Luminous Oil Type S or exact equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or
equivalent
Window washer fluid
4-3/4
4
4.5
*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
*3: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil, which is available at a NISSAN dealer.
*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*5: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.
*6: DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used.
*7: Available in mainland US through a NISSAN dealer.
*8: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
VQ37VHR engine
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96).
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
this will damage the three-way cat-
alyst.
.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded
regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91) may be
temporarily used, but only under the following
precautions:
.
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-
fications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-
cification to improve emission system and
vehicle performance. Ask your service station
manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide
Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications.
.
Have the fuel tank filled only partially with
unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with
unleaded premium gasoline as soon as
possible.
.
If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
methanol blend, is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-
eration.
However, for maximum vehicle perfor-
mance, the use of unleaded premium
gasoline is recommended.
.
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not
available to ensure that all methanol
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-
mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
CAUTION
.
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-
nol with or without advertising their presence.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicles.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended above can
cause persistent, heavy spark knock.
(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)
If severe, this can lead to engine damage.
If you detect a persistent heavy spark
knock even when using gasoline of the
stated octane rating, or if you hear steady
spark knock while holding a steady speed
on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
If any undesirable driveability problems such as
engine stalling or hard hot starting are experi-
enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, im-
mediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a
fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,
after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause
excessive fuel consumption or damage to the
engine. If any of the above symptoms are
encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer or other competent service
facility.
Aftermarket fuel additives
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is no
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector
cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
that the engine oil viscosity be selected based
on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality
genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use
the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the
reason described in change intervals.
STI0505
Change intervals
1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API
certification mark on the front of the container.
Oils which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the
specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals
longer than recommended could reduce engine
life. Damage to engines caused by improper
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter
quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the
new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-
COMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance, see
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/
LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN
recommends the use of an energy conserving oil
in order to improve fuel economy.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under
the following conditions may require more
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
frequent oil and filter changes.
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
regulations require the recovery and recycling of
any refrigerant during automotive air condition-
ing system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the
trained technicians and equipment needed to
recover and recycle your air conditioning system
refrigerant.
.
repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures,
.
.
.
driving in dusty conditions,
extensive idling,
stop and go “rush hour” traffic,
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your
air conditioning system.
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the
lubricant, NISSAN UV Luminous Oil Type
S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or
lubricant will cause severe damage to
the air conditioning system and will
require the replacement of all air con-
ditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ37VHR
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle
6-cylinder, V-slanted at 608
3.760 6 3.385 (95.5 6 86.0)
225.54 (3,696)
Cylinder arrangement
Bore 6 Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
in (mm)
cu in (cm3)
1-2-3-4-5-6
Idle speed
rpm
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
Spark plug
degree/rpm
Standard
in (mm)
FXE24HR-11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Spark plug gap (Normal)
STI0425
Camshaft operation
VQ37VHR engine
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
Type
Size
Offset in (mm)
1.69 (43)
Front: 18 6 8J
Rear: 18 6 9J
Front: 19 6 9J
Rear: 19 6 10J
0.59 (15)
Conventional
1.85 (47)
1.18 (30)
NISMO models
Front: 19 6 9.5J
Rear: 19 6 10.5J
17 6 4T*1
1.57 (40)
0.90 (23)
1.18 (30)
0 (0)
Spare
18 6 4T*1
*1: if so equipped
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIMENSIONS
Tire
in (mm)
Type
Size
Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]
35 (240)*2
Overall length
167.2 (4,246)*1
167.4 (4,253)*2
173.4 (4,405)*1, *3
173.5 (4,407)*2, *3
Front: 225/50R18
Rear: 245/45R18
Front: 245/40R19
Rear: 275/35R19
38 (260)*3
Conventional
35 (240)
35 (240)
60 (420)
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread
72.6 (1,845)
NISMO models
51.8 (1,315)
52.2 (1,325)*4
Front: 245/40R19
Rear: 285/35R19
T145/80D17*1
T145/70R18*1
61.0 (1,550)*5
60.6 (1,540)*6
61.2 (1,555)*6, *3
Spare (T-type)
—*3, *4
Rear tread
Wheelbase
62.8 (1,595)*5
61.6 (1,565)*6
62.2 (1,580)*6, *3
*1: if so equipped
*2: Coupe models
*3: Roadster models
*4: The emergency tire puncture repair kit is supplied.
100.4 (2,550)
*1: Without front license plate bracket
*2: With front license plate bracket
*3: NISMO models
*4: Roadster models
*5: 18-inch wheel models
*6: 19-inch wheel models
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN
ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
If you plan to travel in another country, you
should first find out if the fuel available is suitable
for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating may
cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
STI0613
STI0612
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
(chassis number)
The number is stamped as shown in the engine
compartment.
The vehicle identification number plate is at-
tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsi-
bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0509
STI0616
STI0615
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
The emission control information label is at-
tached as shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0614
STI0617
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
illustrated.
The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached as shown.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
EXCEPT FOR NISMO MODELS
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket
J-nut 6 2
Screw 6 2
Screw grommet 6 2
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground. Locate
A
*
the two dents
on the front bumper.
Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in
(10 mm) drill bit. (Be sure that the drill
only goes through the bumper fascia.)
2. Insert grommets into the hole on the bumper
fascia.
3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
grommet hole to add 908 turn onto the part
B
.
*
4. Make sure the side end surface of the
license plate bracket is aligned with the
C
*
bumper
.
STI0618
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0629
D
Mark the center of the hole
on both
*
sides with a felt-tip pen. Remove the bracket
from the bumper, and then open 0.9 to 1.0
inch (22 to 25 mm) diameter holes on the
D
bumper using the marks
as a center.
*
5. Insert J-nuts into the license plate bracket
before placing the license plate bracket on
the fascia.
6. Install the license plate bracket with screws.
7. Install the license plate with bolts that are no
longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR NISMO MODELS
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket
J-nut 6 2
Screw 6 4
Screw grommet 6 4
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
2. Temporarily place the license plate bracket
A
while aligning points
of the front bumper
in the license plate
*
B
fascia with holes
bracket.
*
A
B
3. Confirm that points
and
are aligned.
*
*
Hold the license plate bracket and mark the
C
points
on the bumper facia through the
*
D
center of the holes
with a felt-tip pen.
*
4. Remove the license plate bracket.
A
5. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes
*
C
and
using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at
the marked locations. (Be sure that the
*
drill only goes through the fascia.)
6. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
STI0650
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOVING AIR DEFLECTORS
(except for NISMO models)
7. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
4. Store the two air deflectors and four screws
to reinstall in the reverse order.
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the
E
*
part
.
5. When reinstalling, make sure all six screws
are firmly tightened on both air deflectors.
8. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket
before placing the license plate bracket on
the fascia.
9. Install the license plate bracket with the
screws.
10. Install the license plate with bolts that are
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
When the recovery hook is used, you need to
temporarily remove the front license plate and
bracket from the vehicle. (See “VEHICLE
RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section for further
details.)
STI0623
Left side
This vehicle is equipped with air deflectors in
front of the front wheels. The deflectors will
change the air flow to help improve aerodynamic
performance.
When transporting your vehicle on a trailer, the
air deflectors may interfere with a steep slope to
a trailer bed. In this case, remove the deflectors
from the undercover of the vehicle.
1. Loosen three screws as shown and remove
A
*
the left-side air deflector
.
B
*
2. Tighten the removed screw
in its
original position.
3. Perform the same procedure to remove the
right-side air deflector.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
cargo.
on the Tire and Loading Information
label.
WARNING
.
.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- maximum total combined weight of the
unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other
optional equipment. This information is
located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the weight of total occupants
weight subtracted from the load limit.
.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside the vehi-
cle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
.
.
Do not allow people to ride in
any area of vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. label.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
.
.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-
ing) - The maximum total weight rating
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and
trailer.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
.
Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly. This
weight does not include passengers
and cargo.
.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
optional equipment, passengers and
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs or
640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
STI0365
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Steps for determining correct load limit
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
shown as “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading
Information label. Do not exceed the
number of occupants shown as “Seating
Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”
later in this section.)
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-
pants, then add the total luggage weight.
Examples are shown in the illustration.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load label.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
LOADING TIPS
to hazardous vehicle handling
and long braking distance. This
may cause a premature tire
malfunction, which could result
in a serious accident and perso-
nal injury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.
.
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
.
Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the gross axle weight ratings
(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should
not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). These ratings are given on the
vehicle certification label. If weight ratings
are exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
.
.
Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shift-
ing. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden
stop or collision, unsecured car-
go could cause personal injury.
Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
.
Overloading could not only
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tires, but also could lead
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TOWING
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
motor home.
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
CAUTION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
.
.
.
Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.
.
Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
TREADWEAR
.
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70
MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your
vehicle.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
always tow forward, never back-
ward.
.
After towing 500 miles, start and idle the
engine with the transmission in Neutral for
two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after
every 500 miles of towing may cause
damage to the transmission’s internal parts.
DO NOT tow any automatic trans-
mission vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground (flat towing). Doing
so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmis-
sion lubrication.
.
For emergency towing procedures
refer to “TOWING RECOMMENDED
BY NISSAN (except for NISMO
models)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN is covered by the following
emission warranties.
WARNING
WARNING
For US:
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
.
.
Emission Defects Warranty
Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
.
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you
did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by
writing to:
.
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas,
your vehicle may be required to be in what is
called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/
Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control
system.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic
conditions and obey all traffic laws.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
it is driven through certain driving patterns.
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle
until the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle points between the C and H (normal
operating temperature).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/
maintenance test readiness condition. Push the
ignition switch to the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”.
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehi-
cle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 2 minutes.
If your vehicle does not pass an I/M test, the MIL
may not come on. Contact a NISSAN dealer to
prepare the vehicle for retesting.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-662-6200.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”
condition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condi-
tion”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the
driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it
for you.
7. Quickly release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely and keep it released for at least for 1
minute. Maintain the speed for at least 5
minutes.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event
Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic
transmission selector lever in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position or the manual
transmission shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
9. Turn the engine off.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
10. Start the engine and allow the engine to idle
for at least 2 hours.
11. Place the ignition switch to the OFF position
and leave the vehicle for at least 90 minutes.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps. Do not stop the
engine until step 7 is completed.
.
How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
.
Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
.
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
.
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment
procedures, this manual is the same one used
by the factory trained technicians working at a
NISSAN dealer. Also available are genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genuine
NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
NISSAN models.
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call
the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-387-
0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will
assist you.
unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at
the end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones
to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate
the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.
Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide
such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine
parts often show premature wear, rust and
corrosion.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important informa-
tion you should know. Many insurance compa-
nies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine
collision parts in order to cut costs, among other
reasons.
Why should you take a chance?
In the USA:
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted
laws that restrict insurance companies from
authorizing the use of non-genuine collision
parts during the new vehicle warranty. These
laws help protect you, so you can take action to
protect yourself.
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later, contact:
Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN
Collision Parts!
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
If you want your vehicle to be restored using
parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting
specifications — if you want to help it to last
and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.
Tell your insurance agent and your repair
shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-
sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-
NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty
apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
1-800-247-5321
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty
protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
contact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Autochanger
Compact Disc (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Automatic
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Brightness control
Display ON/OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Air bag system
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . 1-33
Front-seat mounted side-impact
Air conditioner (Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Automatic adjusting function
(front windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39, 2-12
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Air conditioner
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Auxiliary input jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
C
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . 9-2
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Center multi-function control panel
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Child restraint, Installation using the seat
belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chimes
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Seat belt warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-23
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, 9-6
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Belts (See drive belts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Air deflectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Alarm, How to stop alarm
(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . . . 2-9
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Command (See Bluetooth® Hands-Free
DVD player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Phone System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 4-91
E
F
Command
Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Elapsed time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Emergency tire puncture repair kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Engine
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ... 2-33
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
(See NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . . . . 4-103
Compact Disc (CD) changer
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Compact Disc (CD) player
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37, 4-48
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Coolant
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Repairing flat tire
(with emergency tire puncture repair kit). . . . . . . 6-7
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Fluid
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Cover, Cargo cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine oil replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Engine oil temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine start operation indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
D
Dampers, Performance dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Defroster switch, Rear window defroster
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer (models without navigation system) . . . . 4-41
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (models with navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . . . . . 1-33
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front seat, Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Display cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Driving
Engine start operation indicator
(Manual Transmission models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Headlights
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Fuel economy information (display). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Fuel octane rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel-filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Heater
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Heater and air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . 4-17
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
K
G
I
Keyless entry
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Ignition switch
(Push-button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Automatic transmission models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Manual transmission models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Instrument pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . 2-17
Intelligent Key removal indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
L
Labels
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . 9-11
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-29, 9-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
License plate, Installing front license plate. . . . . . . 9-13
Light
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Hatch, Rear hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Cargo area courtesy light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Interior light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Meter, Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Mirror
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Multi-function controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Music box hard-disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil filter replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Opening the soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Operation, Indicators for operation
(dot matrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
P
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . 8-26
Loading information (See vehicle loading
information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Lock
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear hatch lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Locking with mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Parking
Brake break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Performance dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Phone
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Precautions
N
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
No key warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
O
M
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Oil
Maintenance
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix) . . . . . . 2-19
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance information (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
When starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Push warning
(Automatic Transmission models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8
Roof, Soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Selector lever
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Shift “P” warning
(Automatic Transmission models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
S
Safety
Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Satellite radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41, 4-46
Seat adjustment
Shift lock release
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Seat belt(s)
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Shifting
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Small light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Soft top
R
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) changer (models without navigation
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (models with navigation
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat belt warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts with pretensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat(s)
Climate controlled seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Secondary rear hatch release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Security system, Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . 2-25
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the top does not open or close . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Opening using the Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Soft top indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 3-24
Soft top operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Steering
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Rear hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Rear hatch opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Rear hatch opener switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Rear parcel box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Recorders, Event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Registering your vehicle in another country. . . . . . 9-10
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Repairing flat tire
(with emergency tire puncture repair kit). . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering lock release malfunction
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Tire
Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . 5-15
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light ... 2-10
Sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tire replacement indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio . 4-71
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . 1-39, 2-12
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Switch
Transmitter
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Tires
Emergency tire puncture repair kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-29, 9-12
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Triple meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Trunk
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Trunk release power cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Ignition switch automatic transmission
models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tonneau cover (see cargo cover). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Top, Soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Touch screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Towing
Ignition switch manual transmission
models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
U
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-37
SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Underbody cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Upshift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
USB memory operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
V
T
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Vanity mirror lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tilt steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Information and settings
(models with navigation system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-37
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . 5-27
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Care of wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Window(s)
Voice command (See Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 4-91
Voice command (See NISSAN voice
recognition system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103, 4-113
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Automatic adjusting function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Wiper
W
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-27
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Warning
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
X
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Warning light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39, 2-12
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Seat belt warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Warnings and alerts
(vehicle information display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Warranty, Emission control system warranty. . . . . 9-21
Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
DURES RECOMMENDATION:
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
VQ37VHR engine
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96).
will damage the three way catalyst.
.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-
lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s
Manual. Follow these recommendations for the
future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded
regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91) may be
temporarily used, but only under the following
precautions:
For additional information, see “CAPACITIES
AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
.
Have the fuel tank filled only partially with
unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with
unleaded premium gasoline as soon as
possible.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-
eration.
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for engine oil and
oil filter recommendation.
However, for maximum vehicle perfor-
mance, the use of unleaded premium
gasoline is recommended.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
CAUTION
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, see “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
.
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control systems, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, since this
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|